Quarterlytics / Headlam Group

Headlam Group

head · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker head
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2017 Annual Report · Headlam Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
H

e

a

d

l

a

m

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

f

o

r

t

h

e

y

e

a

r

e

n

d

e

d

3

1

D

e

c

e

m

b

e

r

2

0

1

7

DELIVERI N G

MORE 

Annual report and accounts 2017

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
MORE

FLOORCOVERINGS

Headlam Group plc (‘Headlam’ or ‘the Company’) 
is Europe’s largest distributor of floorcoverings, 
providing the distribution channel between suppliers 
and its customers.

Headlam provides suppliers with an unparalleled route 
to market for their products, and its customers with 
the broadest product offering supported by excellent 
customer service and next day delivery.

Over the last 25 years, the Company has built and 
consolidated its market-leading position through 
organic growth, acquisition, considerable investment 
in its extensive distribution network and people, and 
strong relationships with suppliers and customers.  

CONTENTS

OVERVIEW

01  2017 Highlights
02  At a Glance
03  Headlam in Numbers
Investment Case
08 

STRATEGIC REPORT

09  Chairman’s Statement
10  Chief Executive’s Review
12  Financial Review
18  Our Marketplace
20  Our Business Model
22  Our Strategic Pillars
24  Key Performance Indicators
26  Risk Management and Principal Risks  

& Uncertainties
27  Viability Statement
30  Corporate Responsibility

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

44  Board of Directors and Senior Management 

Team

46  Chairman’s Introduction to Governance
47  The Board’s Activities 2017
48  Corporate Governance Report
52  Nomination Committee Report
54  Audit Committee Report
60  Directors’ Remuneration Report
74  Other Statutory Disclosures
78  Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

79 

Independent auditors’ report to the members  
of Headlam Group plc

84  Consolidated Income Statement
85  Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive 

Income

86  Statements of Financial Position
87  Statement of Changes in Equity - Group
88  Statement of Changes in Equity - Company
89  Cash Flow Statements
90  Notes to the Financial Statements 
129  Financial Record

IBC  Advisers and Financial Calendar

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

2017 FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

Revenue £million

£707.8m
+2.0% (2016: £693.6m)
2017
2016 
2015 
2014 
2013 

603.1

707.8
693.6

654.1
635.2

Underlying* Operating Profit £million

£43.8m
+6.6% (2016: £41.1m)
2017
2016 
2015 
2014 
2013 

43.8

41.1
36.8
31.5

27.7

Underlying* Profit before Tax £million

£43.1m
+7.5% (2016: £40.1m)
2017
2016 
2015 
2014 
2013 

30.3

26.4

43.1

40.1

35.6

(2017 Statutory Profit before Tax: £40.7m (2016: £38.2m))

Basic Earnings Per Share pence

39.1p
+6.3% (2016: 36.8p)
2017
2016 
2015 
2014 
2013 

18.0

28.6

39.1

36.8

33.8

Visit www.headlam.com for more information

2017 OPERATIONAL HIGHLIGHTS

•  Considerable new expertise added to the Board, Senior Management Team 
and at managerial level, both in the UK and Continental Europe, including 
the appointment of Chris Payne as Chief Financial Officer 

•  Three acquisitions completed during the year, most notably Domus Group 
of Companies Limited which meaningfully diversifies and broadens the 
Company’s overall position in the market 

•  Efficiency actions and initiatives implemented, with a more unitised 

approach across the Company’s businesses

*Before non-underlying items being intangibles amortisation relating to businesses 
acquired, acquisitions fees and non-recurring costs relating to personnel changes  

Total Ordinary Dividends (declared and 
proposed in respect of 2017) pence

24.80p
+10.0% (2016: 22.55p)
2017
2016 
2015 
2014 
2013 

17.50

15.30

24.80

22.55

20.70

Net Cash Position £million

£35.3m
-32.9% (2016: £52.6m)
2017
2016 
2015 
2014 
2013

35.3

14.0

24.6

43.9

52.6

01

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

At a Glance

WITH 63 BUSINESSES AND OPERATIONS IN 
FOUR COUNTRIES, WE ARE EUROPE’S LARGEST 
DISTRIBUTOR OF FLOORCOVERINGS

What we do and how we do it
Headlam provides the distribution channel between 
suppliers and customers of floorcoverings, providing 
suppliers with an unparalleled route to market for their 

products, and its customers with the broadest product 
offering supported by excellent customer service and 
next day delivery.

Our markets
UK
FRANCE
SWITZERLAND 
NETHERLANDS

Revenue by geography

n United Kingdom 
n  Continental Europe 

86%
14% 

Revenue by sector

n Residential 
n  Commercial 

68%
32%

For the year ended 31 December 2017.

4

COUNTRIES OF 
OPERATION

BUILT LEADING POSITION 
OVER 25 YEARS

02

 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

2,427

EMPLOYEES

63

BUSINESSES

03

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

At a Glance continued

Built up over the last 25 years and employing 
2,427 people, (as at 31 December 2017) 
Headlam has the greatest overall customer 
penetration in the UK and Continental  
Europe marketplace with an extensive 
distribution network enabling rapid delivery  
of almost 22,000 product units (‘SKUs’). 
Through its market-leading capabilities and 
emphasis on the supplier and customer 
proposition, Headlam has supported the 
development and growth of both its suppliers  
and customers.

Headlam enables suppliers to focus on 
economic manufacturing without having to 
replicate a costly distribution channel for their 
focused product portfolio. Headlam’s 
distribution network ensures that customers 
receive products more efficiently and within 
the typically short timescales required, whilst 
also supporting suppliers with the positioning 
and marketing of their products.

Headlam’s customer base comprises 
principally independent retailers and flooring 
contractors and spans both the residential 
and commercial sectors, with the residential 
sector generating approximately two-thirds 
of annual revenue. While also operating in a 
number of more specialised market 
segments and distributing a number of niche 
products, the Company’s core business is 
characterised by a high volume of small value 
orders, reflecting a predominance of orders 
for single room refurbishment.

The Company had 71,257 active customer 
accounts at 31 December 2017 (67,807 in  
the core business), with the breadth and 
strength of customer relationships achieved 
through the Company operating 63 individual 
businesses across the UK and Continental 
Europe (France, Switzerland and the 
Netherlands). Each business operates under 
their own unique trade brand and utilises their 
individual sales teams, thereby increasing the 
sales opportunity into the customer base  
and ultimately the Company’s overall market 
penetration. By virtue of its market 
penetration, Headlam is involved with  
every facet of, and participant in, the 
floorcoverings industry.

The multiple business approach is additionally 
supported by the huge selection of 
floorcoverings on offer combined with the 
relationship-driven and regionalised nature of 
the marketplace. Sales representatives and 
delivery drivers are the main interface with the 
customers, with the latter typically delivering 
to the same customer on a daily basis.

Headlam enables, customers to satisfy the 
end-consumers’ needs through offering the 
broadest range of products on a next day 
delivery basis, with end-consumers invariably 
wanting the product installed quickly once 
the purchase decision has been made. 
Customers are supported by Headlam’s 
frequent and multiple sales representatives’ 

visits, customer service, Point of Sale (‘POS’) 
materials, market awareness of new product 
lines and trends, and centralised financial and 
other resources including credit terms.
The Company’s extensive distribution 
network has been established over the last  
25 years through considerable financial 
investment and technical and operational 
expertise, and represents a significant barrier 
to entry to competitors and potential new 
entrants. It currently comprises over  
67 million cubic feet of warehouse capacity 
and its value is underpinned by property, plant 
and equipment assets totalling £101.6 million 
(net book value as at 31 December 2017).  
In 2017, 5.5 million customer orders were 
processed and delivered utilising a fleet of 
404 commercial vehicles. Almost 9% of 
orders were place on-line during 2017, with 
strategies in place to grow this percentage. 

The core distribution network comprises four 
national distribution hubs in the UK and 18 
regional distribution centres across the UK 
and Continental Europe, augmented by 
smaller warehouse premises, trade counters, 
showrooms and specification centres. The 
establishment of trade counters, showrooms 
and specification centres has been aimed at 
generating further sales through expanding 
the physical footprint and being closer to the 
customer, enhancing the regionalised 
customer service proposition, increasing 
awareness of the trade brands, and appealing 
to segments of the customer base who 
prefer a collection service. 

04

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

The Company continues to invest in the 
network to support growth whilst also focusing 
on its optimisation to improve operational 
efficiency and cost-effectiveness, and 
ultimately its profitability.

Through organic growth, acquisition and 
optimisation of operations, Headlam will look to 
build on its market-leading core business whilst 
simultaneously diversifying and broadening its 

overall market position with entry into or 
increased weightings in more specialist market 
segments or product lines. These opportunities 
will be pursued across the UK and Continental 
Europe helping Headlam cement its position as 
the leading distributor across the European 
floorcoverings industry. 

HEADLAM IN NUMBERS*

SUPPLIERS:

119

significant 
suppliers

HEADLAM:

16

21,763

34%

primary supplier 
countries

product units 
(‘SKUs’)

of products 
purchased from 
UK suppliers in 
2017

67

million cubic feet 
of warehouse 
capacity

5.5m

customer orders 
processed in 2017

404

commercial 
vehicles

64

trade counters, 
showrooms and 
specification 
centres

CUSTOMERS:

67,807

active customer 
accounts

£133

average order 
value in 2017

68%

9%

2017 revenue from 
residential sector

orders placed 
on-line in 2017

*Suppliers and Customers numbers provided above are for those of the core business only in 2017.

05

M O R E

EFFI CI EN CY

EFFI CI EN CY

“We are pleased with our performance 
during 2017, not just in terms of financial 
results, which were particularly pleasing 
given the softness in the UK market 
during the majority of the second half of 
the year, but also the progress made 
towards improving our operational 
processes and increasing efficiency 
across the Company.”

Steve Wilson 
Chief Executive 

07

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Investment Case

SIGNIFICANT BARRIERS TO ENTRY 
CREATED THROUGH YEARS OF 
INVESTMENT AND DEVELOPMENT 
OF OPERATIONAL EXPERTISE

08

1. MARKET LEADERMarket-leading position, significant scale, and longevity of operations• Nearest competitors currently approximately 1/6th of size in terms of revenue • Significant barriers to entry2. RELATIONSHIPSDepth and breadth of supplier and customer relationships• Typically, suppliers’ largest UK customer, with purchasing economies of scale• Supporting the growth and development of all participants in the floorcoverings industry, particularly independent retailers and flooring contractors 3. CURRENCY EXPOSURESManagement of transactional currency risk• Buy in sterling from the majority of suppliers so supplier manages the currency risk• Supplier price increases passed along the chain and not absorbed by the business • Negative aspects of currency deflation avoided by product re-engineering or  price renegotiation 4. DEGREE OF RESILIENCEResilient core business characterised by high volume of small value orders• More affordable purchase than other Repair, Maintenance and Improvement (‘RMI’) expenditure – average order value  of £133 in 2017• Not reliant on consumer credit5. DISTRIBUTION NETWORKExtensive distribution network with value underpinned by a largely freehold asset portfolio• Significant time and resources to replicate• Dense geographical footprint underpinning customer service proposition• Freehold portfolio enables flexible response to change 6. OPERATIONAL GEARINGOperational gearing from increasing revenue and leveraging of the business model• 19.1% underlying drop-through rate as a percentage of incremental revenue in 2017• Combination of increased gross margin and a more efficient overhead base creating improved operating margin 7. FOCUS ON MARGINFocus on margin enhancement and efficiencies to increase level of profitability • A number of efficiency initiatives underway and to be implemented• Gross and underlying operating margin improvements of 50 and 30 basis points respectively in 20178. STRONG FINANCIALSStrong cash flow and balance sheet• Net funds of £35.3 million as at  31 December 2017• Cash from operations of £54.5 million  in 2017• Strong operating cash generation at 109.8% of underlying EBITDA in 20179. DIVIDENDProgressive dividend policy• Ordinary dividend payments correlated to the increase in basic EPS, with total ordinary dividend payment of 24.80 pence in respect of 2017• Additional policy of returning surplus cash to shareholders via special dividend when circumstances permit10. GROWTHGrowing and broadening overall position in the industry• Growing market-leading core business• Supplementary growth and increased market penetration through acquisition Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Chairman’s Statement

Dick Peters
Non-Executive Chairman

As previously announced, having been on  
the Board of Headlam for almost half of the 
25 years the Company has been operating,  
I am stepping down at the end of May 2018 
after 12 years.

Between 2013, the year I became Chairman, 
and 2017, the Company has grown revenue 
and underlying profit before tax by 17.4% and 
63.1% respectively, and paid and declared total 
dividends of 114.85 pence per share (in respect 
of the five years). This fantastic achievement is 
testament to the hard work, commitment and 
endeavour of all our employees across the UK 
and Continental Europe.

Headlam is a market-leading business with 
financial strength and, through years of 
investment and continuous development of 
operational expertise, has created significant 
barriers to entry in the UK market. Allied to 
this, the Company has ample opportunities to 
grow and improve its performance.

Since 2016, concerted actions and initiatives 
have been underway in the recognition that, 
despite the Company’s recent successful 
history, its performance and operations could 
be further improved in a number of areas. 
These recent actions have been validated by 
the Company’s performance during 2017, 
most notably in the area of gross and 
underlying operating margin improvement, 
which increased by 50 and 30 basis points 
respectively compared with 2016.

The Company demonstrated both resilience 
and robustness during 2017 and continued to 
grow despite softer market conditions 
compared with 2016. The outturn in 2017 is 
testament to the business model, collective 
industry experience, and an inherent 
predictability to the pattern of the revenue 
stream year-on-year, despite the lack of a 
tangible order book within the core business.

I believe the actions and initiatives put in 
place, operationally and in the areas of 
governance and corporate responsibility,  
will ensure a continued improvement in the 
Company’s performance and its overall 
success.

We have made several notable additions to 
the Board and Senior Management Team 
during 2017 and early 2018 which will further 
assist in providing the necessary expertise 
and guidance to the Company going forward, 
and I remain confident about the Company’s 
future prospects. 

I have greatly valued and enjoyed my time at 
Headlam, particularly the support and 
interaction with my fellow Board members 
and a vast number of the Company’s 
employees which has proven to be invaluable. 
I would like to express my sincere thanks to all 
of Headlam’s stakeholders for their continued 
support of the Company and wish everyone 
well for the future.

Dick Peters
Non-Executive Chairman 

6 March 2018

09

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Chief Executive’s Review

Steve Wilson
Chief Executive

INTRODUCTION
We are pleased with our performance during 
2017, not just in terms of the financial results, 
which were particularly pleasing given the 
softness in the UK market during the majority 
of the second half of the year, but also the 
progress made towards improving our 
operational processes and increasing 
efficiency across the Company.

We have a clear intent to build on our 
market-leading position and financial 
strength, to deliver growth, enhanced 
customer service, operational and margin 
improvement and an enriched culture in  
order to create value for the benefit of all  
our stakeholders.

2017 FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
Total revenue grew to £707.8 million in 2017, 
an increase of 2.0% on 2016 (1.2% in constant 
currency), with like-for-like revenue* growth 
in the UK and Continental Europe of 0.5% and 
4.2% respectively representing a positive 
performance against a strong 2016 
comparator. The second half of 2017 was 
characterised by weaker markets, with the 
first half delivering revenue growth of 4.0% 
compared with 2.0% for the year as a whole. 
Despite slower top-line growth, the Company 
was able to deliver an improved profit 
performance, increasing underlying** profit 
before tax by 7.5% to £43.1 million (2016 : 
£40.1 million) due to the concerted focus on 
margin enhancement and efficiencies 
throughout 2017. 

The gross margin improvement of 50 basis 
points to 31.1% in 2017 (2016: 30.6%) was 
achieved through more effective 
organisation and streamlining of the 
Company’s businesses’ processes, with the 
largest contributor being the elimination of 
inconsistent pricing practices coupled with a 
move towards a more unitised pricing policy. 
Other actions implemented during 2017, and 
as detailed in the interim results 
announcement in August 2017, included 
reduction in the inventory aged profile, 
warehouse reconfiguration to improve 
capacity and delivery efficiency and an 

10

increasing focus on higher margin and 
exclusive products. 

While the improvement in gross margin 
through a more cohesive and focused 
approach was pleasingly evident during 2017, 
the contributions from other efficiency 
initiatives will only begin to be realisable from 
2018 onwards. Of key interest is the outcome 
from stock reordering trials and from other 
initiatives relating to more effective utilisation 
of the delivery fleet and expenditure incurred 
on goods and services not for resale.

INVESTMENTS 
AND ACQUISITIONS
Investments 
In Continental Europe we appointed a new 
Managing Director, Pascal Pinard, in January 
2018 to lead our French business, LMS.  
Pascal brings a wealth of international 
experience gained from 30 years in the 
floorcoverings industry, and it is anticipated 
that this positive step will address LMS’s 
decline in performance which has been 
evident for a number of years. We remain 
encouraged by the performance of our Dutch 
business despite its currently modest size, 
and though the Swiss business may have 
been hampered by some transitional 
management gaps, actions are underway to 
address these and we remain confident that, 
with time, the business will regain its previous 
level of performance. 

We believe the countries from which we 
operate in Continental Europe represent  
a platform for growth and potential 
consolidation, being a much more 
fragmented marketplace compared with  
the UK, and we will look to make further 
investments should the right opportunities 
arise, as illustrated by the Dutch acquisition 
announced today and detailed later in  
this review. 

Significant investment and capital 
expenditure is expected to be undertaken 
during 2018 and 2019 in relation to the 
proposed new distribution centre in the 
Ipswich area, with capital expenditure 

anticipated to total approximately £24 million. 
We are now in a meaningful position to 
progress our plans having secured exclusivity 
in January 2018 on a site identified in late 
2017. The site meets all our requirements in 
terms of investment criteria, operational 
considerations, growth capacity, and the 
support it will provide to several of our 
businesses in the wider area. Hopefully this 
will end the frustrating wait for a larger 
footprint in this part of the UK to support 
growth, and we are determined to commence 
operations from the centre as soon as 
possible having drawn up a schedule of works 
and stages which would see us able to do so  
in late 2019 or early 2020.

Acquisitions 
We completed three acquisitions during  
the year, Mitchell Carpets Limited, McMillan 
Flooring Distributors Limited and Domus 
Group of Companies Limited (‘Domus’), for  
an anticipated total consideration of £31.9 
million and increasing our total number of 
businesses to 62 at the year-end. All three 
acquisitions added key strategic locations  
in the UK and further supplemented our 
network, while Domus additionally 
significantly increased the Company’s 
presence in the commercial  
specification market. 

During 2017 the Company largely refocused 
its acquisition strategy towards acquiring 
market-leading businesses with meaningful 
income streams that bring strategic benefits, 
further geographic coverage, increase or 
expand the Company’s market presence into 
certain underweight product lines and market 
segments, and provide market segment 
consolidation opportunities. The strategy is 
aimed at diversifying and broadening the 
Company’s overall position in the 
floorcoverings market by providing a 
complement to the Company’s market-
leading and long-established core 
distribution business which is characterised 
by the supply of high volume small value 
orders into both the residential and 
commercial sectors. During 2017, the 
Company’s average order value was  
£133 (2016: £127).

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

The earnings enhancing acquisition of Domus 
as announced in December 2017 is a perfect 
illustration of the refocused acquisition 
strategy. Acquired for £24.2 million of cash  
on completion with deferred discounted 
consideration of £4.9 million, Domus is the 
UK’s leading specification consultant and 
supplier of hard surfaces for premium 
construction and refurbishment projects, 
with a core product offering of premium 
ceramic tiles and additionally engineered 
flooring for application in the residential and 
commercial project markets. Domus’s areas 
of expertise and position in the marketplace  
is almost entirely complementary to 
Headlam’s, with minimal overlap in terms of 
product lines, suppliers and customer base, 
and we look forward to exploring the available 
growth opportunities.

In addition, we are delighted to announce 
today the acquisition of Dersimo BV 
(‘Dersimo’) based in Western Netherlands, 
bringing our total number of businesses to 63. 
For the year ended 31 December 2017, 
Dersimo’s revenue and profit before tax 
amounted to €10.1 million and €0.4 million 
respectively. Established in 1972, Dersimo is a 
highly-regarded family-owned floorcoverings 
distribution business involved in both the 
residential and commercial sectors and 
employing 23 people. The acquisition of 
Dersimo is also earnings enhancing and firmly 
in-line with the refocused acquisition 
strategy, providing an increased weighting in 
the commercial sector in the Netherlands 
where we were previously underweight, 
improved geographic coverage across the 
country, and a much more meaningful overall 
market position. Combined with our existing 
Dutch business Headlam BV, the acquisition 
is believed to position us within the top three 
or four in the Dutch marketplace in terms of 
size. Dersimo will continue to be operated  
as a standalone business under its own trade 
brand and from its existing premises. Going 
forward it is anticipated that Dersimo and 
Headlam BV will support each other in  
terms of deliveries and stock giving rise to  
operating efficiencies.

The pipeline of acquisition opportunities 
remains strong but it is the Company’s 
intention to retain a disciplined approach, 
targeting only the most rewarding 
opportunities without recourse to  
excessive leverage.

DIVIDENDS
The following Financial Review reiterates our 
polices in relation to progressive ordinary 
dividends and the potential returning of 
surplus cash to shareholders via special 
dividends when circumstances permit. In-line 
with the Board’s ordinary dividend policy,  
a final dividend of 17.25 pence (2016: 15.85 
pence) has been proposed, payable on 6 July 
2018 to shareholders on the register at  
1 June 2018, bringing the total ordinary 
dividend declared and proposed in respect  
of 2017 to 24.80 pence (2016: 22.55 pence). 
This 10.0% increase in the total ordinary 
dividend reflects the Company’s ongoing 
commitment to increasing the ordinary 
dividend based upon basic earnings per share 
uplift, and the slight improvement arising 
from the cover ratio being rounded to 1.6.

OUR PEOPLE
To help deliver our strategic aims, 
considerable new expertise has been added 
during 2017 and the beginning of 2018 to 
complement the unrivalled knowledge and 
unique collective experience of the industry 
held by the existing members of the Board, 
the Senior Management Team and our 
business leaders. 

At Board level, Tony Judge, who has worked  
at the Company since March 1992, was 
appointed as Chief Operating Officer in 
March 2017; Chris Payne joined the Company 
as Chief Financial Officer in September 2017; 
and, subsequent to the period-end,  
Amanda Aldridge was appointed a  
Non-Executive Director.

As previously announced, Dick Peters, the 
Company’s Non-Executive Chairman, is 
stepping down from the Board on 31 May 
2018 after 12 years and Philip Lawrence, a 
Non-Executive Director since June 2015, will 
be appointed Non-Executive Chairman with 
effect from 1 June 2018. I would again like to 
offer my sincere thanks and gratitude to Dick 
for his invaluable contribution to the 
development of Headlam over the past 12 
years, and to Philip for assuming the position 
of Chairman allowing the Company to 
continue building on Dick’s legacy and Philip’s 
in-depth knowledge.

At a Senior Management and managerial 
level, we have made key appointments in the 
areas of Human Resources, Health & Safety, 
Communications, Company Secretarial and 
Legal Counsel. The introduction of these 
additional resources and expertise will be 
instrumental in enabling us to uphold the 
highest standards in all areas of operational 
processes, governance and corporate 
responsibility. We remain firmly committed  
to the continued investment in our business 
to support its operational and financial 
performance, the delivery of the strategic 
aims, and the success and wellbeing of all  
our employees. 

CURRENT TRADING
Against a very strong January 2017 
comparator, the Company’s overall like-for-
like revenue* declined 5.9% in January 2018, 
with the UK showing a more pronounced 
reduction, 6.7%, predominantly due to the 
performance of the residential sector and the 
adverse impact of a reduction of orders from 
one of our larger customers. In contrast, 
Continental Europe delivered a strongly 
positive result for the residential sector in the 
month, 6.5% on a like-for-like revenue* basis. 
The negative UK performance in the month 
was largely attributable to a very soft first 
working week following the New Year holiday, 
with the rest of the month showing some 
recovery but remaining moderately below  
our expectations.

The like-for-like revenue* performance in 
February 2018 was similar to January 2018, 
with a continued reduction of orders from the 
larger customer mentioned above and 
generally softer markets. However, given the 
very early stage in the year and our greater 
focus on profit rather than top-line growth, 
with organic revenue growth being a lesser 
contributor to the Company achieving its 
overall plans and expectations, our 
expectations for 2018 remain unchanged  
at this stage despite the weaker markets. 

CONCLUSION 
As previously stated, we are pleased with our 
performance during 2017, exhibiting further 
growth against what was qualitatively viewed 
as an overall flat market, robustness in the 
face of a weaker second half of the year, and 
improved profitability as a consequence of 
our focus on efficiency initiatives. The 
acquisitions of Domus and Dersimo illustrate 
that we have ample opportunities to grow and 
broaden our overall leading position in the 
industry while continuing to invest in the 
business to support organic growth. I 
personally wish to thank all our people for 
their contribution to the 2017 result, and look 
forward to delivering further improvements  
in 2018. 

Steve Wilson
Chief Executive

6 March 2018

*Like-for-like revenue is calculated based on constant 
currency from activities and businesses that made a full 
contribution in both the 2017 and 2016 periods and is 
adjusted for any variances in working days

**Before non-underlying items being intangibles 
amortisation relating to businesses acquired, 
acquisitions fees and non-recurring costs relating to 
personnel changes  

11

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Financial Review 

Chris Payne
Chief Financial Officer

REVENUE
During the year, total revenue improved by 2.0% from £693.6 million to £707.8 million, an increase of £14.2 million.
Like-for-like revenue* growth in the UK and Continental Europe was 0.5% and 4.2% respectively. 

Revenue for the year ended 31 December 2016
  UK 
  Continental Europe

Items contributing to growth during the 12-month period 
to 31 December 2017

UK:
Like-for-like* growth
One less working day
Acquisitions

Continental Europe: 
Like-for-like* growth
Changes in working days
Translation effect

  Total movement
Revenue for the year ended 31 December 2017
  UK 
  Continental Europe

£000

%

£000

%

602,104
91,468

86.8
13.2

693,572

100.0

3,043
(2,421)
4,508

3,860
(617)
5,819

0.5
(0.4)
0.8

4.2
(0.7)
–

607,234
100,530

85.8
14.2

5,130

0.9

9,062

14,192

9.9

2.0

707,764

100.0

*Like-for-like revenue is calculated based on constant currency from activities and businesses that made a full contribution in both the 2017 and 2016 periods and is adjusted for 
any variances in working days

UK
The Company’s UK overall growth of 0.9% was achieved in a softer market compared with 2016, particularly in the commercial sector, and was 
based on organic growth of £3.0 million, contributions from acquired businesses amounting to £4.5 million and then, due to 2016 having one 
additional working day, lost revenue opportunity in 2017 amounting to £2.4 million.

The residential sector represented 70.4% of UK revenue in 2017 and increased by 1.0% on a like-for-like* basis. Conversely the commercial 
sector, representing 29.6% of UK revenue in 2017, decreased by 0.7% on a like-for-like* basis.

Continental Europe
The contribution and performance from the Continental European businesses improved throughout the year with the first half like-for-like 
revenue* growth of 3.0% increasing to 4.3% during the second half giving rise to an annual increase of 4.2%. Continental Europe accounted for 
14.2% of total revenue in 2017, up from 13.2% in 2016. Each of the businesses on the Continent performed well in the year, in particular the 
businesses in the Netherlands and France showing good revenue growth and the Swiss business showed growth at more modest levels 
compared to 2016. The weighting between residential and commercial sector revenue in Continental Europe showed a slight movement towards 
residential compared with 2016, accounting for 52.6% of revenue (2016: 50.7%).

12

 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

GROSS MARGIN
Gross margin increased by 50 basis points in the year from 30.6% to 31.1%. As detailed in the Chief Executive’s Review, this was largely as a result 
of more effective organisation and the successful implementation of ‘self-help’ measures aimed at ensuring the Company maintained pricing 
discipline. Many of the measures were instigated toward the end of 2016 and were effectively maintained during 2017.

EXPENSES
Combined distribution and administrative expenses increased by 3.1%, up £5.3 million to £178.7 million. On an underlying basis the increase was 
marginally lower at 2.8% which largely reflects inflationary increases and the cost of living award given to all employees earning £42,500 or below 
of 2.0%. The percentage proportions of distribution and administration expenses of total expenses for 2017 remained largely unaltered 
compared with 2016, being 73.0% and 27.0% respectively (2016: 73.8% and 26.2%).

The increase in people cost of £1.2 million was again the largest underlying component increase, being 32.3% of the gross underlying expenses 
increase before currency translation reflecting the 2.0% cost of living award to employees.

The investment in sampling decreased year-on-year by £1.1 million following an efficiency focus to minimise sampling spend, particularly in the 
Company’s Lifestyle branded products. Legal and professional fees increased by £1.0 million largely as a result of strategic objective related spend.

The non-underlying costs are discussed in more detail in the notes to the accounts.

Costs relating to the currency translation of the Continental European businesses amounted to £1.6 million, reflecting the degree to which 
Sterling depreciated against the Euro and Swiss Franc in 2017.

Total expenses

Distribution

Administration

Expenses for 2016

  Significant movements in 2017:

  People cost

  Vehicle expenses

  Carriage and packaging costs

  Sampling investment

  Bad debts

  Depreciation

  Legal and professional fees

IT

  Prior year exchange gain

  Pension costs
  Other

Underlying sub total

  Non-underlying

Total before currency translation

  Currency translation

  Expenses for 2017

£000

127,982

%

73.8

£000

45,377

£000

173,359

1,211

483

293

%

32.3

12.9

7.8

2,391

537

293

(1,051)

(28.0)

(1,051)

348

(234)

1,023

418

471

415
(100)

3,277

472

3,749
1,589

9.3

(6.2)

27.3

11.1

12.6

11.1
(2.7)

87.4

12.6

100.0

348

(120)

–

–

–

–
(1,230)

1,168

–

1,168
1,326

204.7

46.0

25.1

(90.0)

29.8

(10.3)

–

–

–

–
(105.3)

100.0

–

100.0

(1,180)

(54)

–

–

–

(114)

1,023

418

471

415
1,130

2,109

472

2,581
263

%

26.2

(45.7)

(2.1)

–

–

–

(4.4)

39.6

16.2

18.2

16.1
43.8

81.7

18.3

100.0

178,697

130,476

73.0

48,221

27.0

13

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Financial Review continued

OPERATING PROFIT
The underlying operating profit for 2017 increased by 6.6% compared to 2016 with the operating margin at 6.2%, improving from 5.9%, 
reflecting the absolute gain in gross margin due to the pricing discipline initiatives instigated toward the end of 2016. The operating margin 
generated by the incremental revenue (“drop through rate”) of 19.1% compared with 10.9% in 2016 demonstrates the strong operational gearing 
inherent in the business model.

Operating profit 2016
Gross margin improvement in 2017
  Volume benefit
  Pricing benefit 
  Effect of acquisitions 

Expenses increase
  Distribution
  Administration

 Effect of acquisitions

  Total increase

Operating profit 2017

Drop through rate %
Operating margin %
Improvement %

Underlying 
£000

Non-underlying 
£000

41,072

(1,927)

–
–
–

–

–
(472)
–

(472)

(2,399)

3,011
3,137
1,429

7,577

(1,557)
(1,745)
(1,564)

(4,866)

43,783

19.1
6.2
6.6

Total 
£000

39,145

3,011
3,137
1,429

7,577

(1,557)
(2,217)
(1,564)

(5,338)

41,384

15.8
5.8
5.7

TAX
The underlying effective tax rate for 2017 was 18.5% (2016: 18.9%) which is lower than the headline rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19.25%. 
The main reason for this difference was due to a release in provisions for uncertain tax positions following the ongoing review of the level of tax 
risks in the Company. The anticipated effective underlying rate for 2018 is expected to be 17.5%. The full effective rate of tax in 2017 was 19.1% 
(2016: 18.9%) since some of the non-underlying costs were disallowable for tax. 

The Company is committed to being fully compliant with the relevant tax laws and compliance obligations regarding the filing of tax returns, 
payment and collection of tax. The Company maintains an open relationship with HM Revenue & Customs and currently operates with a level of 
tax compliance risk that is rated as “low”.

EARNINGS AND DIVIDEND
Ordinary dividends
The Board’s ordinary dividend policy is aimed at improving both the interim and final dividends, such that the total of the interim and final 
dividends for any particular year increases in line with the basic earnings per ordinary share for that year. 

When declaring the interim and recommending the final dividend, the Board considers the Company’s cash resource and adequacy of 
distributable reserves. 

Over the last five years (inclusive of 2017), the Company’s total ordinary dividends and basic earnings per ordinary share have grown at  
a compound average growth rate of 12.8% and 21.4% respectively.

Year ending  
31 December 

Basic EPS
pence 

Total Ordinary Dividend
pence

2013
2014
2015
2016
2017

18.0
28.6
33.8
36.8
39.1

15.30
17.50
20.70
22.55
24.80

Cover
ratio

1.2
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

The relationship between ordinary dividends and basic earnings per share can alternatively be expressed as a cover ratio as shown above.

14

 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

The Board believes that although there is a continuing underlying risk relating to potential volatility around future maintainable growth in 
European floorcovering markets and the consequential impact this could have on earnings, it is nonetheless of the view that the current policy 
should continue during the medium-term. Additionally, and subject to the nature and term of any adverse movement in earnings and 
assessments around future trading, the Board may allow a change in the cover ratio in order to maintain the dividend. 

In implementing the policy, the Board ensures the parent company has sufficient distributable reserves from which to make the distribution.  
The table below illustrates the reserves position for the last five years and the ability of the parent to fund the dividend payment as measured by 
the number of years cover. On average, over the last five years, the parent has maintained reserves sufficient to cover 4.4 years of dividend. 
Details of current year distributable reserves are shown in the retained earnings column in the Statement of Changes in Equity.

Distributable reserves

Year ending 31 
December

Parent
£000 

Group
£000

Proposed
Dividends
£000

2013
2014
2015
2016
2017

71,220
57,241
76,452
85,795
105,128

124,465
126,018
137,603
143,315
157,903

12,689
14,655
22,464
25,729
20,932

Years
cover

5.6
3.9
4.4
3.3
5.0

SPECIAL DIVIDENDS
The Company has previously undertaken an expansive investment programme to improve and increase the capacity and reach of  
its infrastructure.

However, from time to time, the Company’s commitment to expansionary capital expenditure will pause, as was the case during 2016 and 2017 
and therefore, subject to ongoing levels of cash generation being maintained, the Company may carry a capital position in excess of that which 
would be required to maintain its asset base.

This situation may leave the way open for a return of surplus capital to shareholders, and in the Board’s opinion, this can be best achieved 
through the payment of special dividends as was the case in 2016 and 2017, amounting to 6.0 pence and 8.0 pence per share respectively.

As outlined in the Final Results announcement and Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015, the conditions that will 
apply to any special dividend payments are; i) the Company’s forecast average net debt in the year in which the special dividend is paid should be 
approximately equal to or less than 0.5 of EBITDA; ii) the cover ratio of the aggregated ordinary and special dividends when expressed in terms  
of dividend cover will not be less than one and; iii) the payment must be made from available distributable reserves.

Having assessed the Company’s cash effect of its future spend in the investment programme (for example in the development of the Ipswich 
distribution centre in 2018 and 2019) and in pursuing the strategic aim of acquisitive growth, the Company is not declaring a special dividend  
for 2018.

Dividend announcements, approvals and payments are typically expected to be as follows:

Dividend

Current ordinary interim

Current ordinary final

Status and date 
announced

Declared
August

Approval

The Board
August

Approximate  
payment date

January in the year
following announcement

Recommended
March

AGM by shareholders
May

July

GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS
The recent acquisition of Domus Group of Companies Limited (‘Domus’) has caused the Board to consider and then re-evaluate the Company’s 
approach to valuing goodwill and the associated intangible assets generated. The two smaller acquisitions made earlier in 2017 were treated in  
a similar way to previous acquisitions whereby any intangible assets generated from the customer relationships or order books, which were 
typically low value, were fully written down in the year of acquisition. This approach was deemed to be inappropriate for the much larger 
acquisition of Domus.

In arriving at a value for goodwill and the associated intangible assets, the Group has taken a judgment on the discounted fair value of the 
contingent consideration (a maximum gross value of £2.7 million) which is payable three years after completion. Similarly, the Company has  
taken judgments over attributing values for the intangible assets of order book, brand value and customer relationships together with a useful 
economic life over which to amortise the assets. This ranges from circa two years for the order book, to 15 years for the brand and ten years for 
the customer relationships. After evaluating the above, this leaves the Group with a residual goodwill value of £23.0 million which reflects the 
overall value to the Group as a result of having a more diverse product range and route to market. 

The amortisation charge to the Consolidated Income Statement for this transaction was £0.1 million in 2017 and is expected to be £1.3 million  
in 2018, although this will decline in future years as the intangible assets become fully written down. 

15

 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Financial Review continued

Going forward it is anticipated that this revised approach will be applied to future acquisitions meaning there is likely to be an assessment of 
goodwill, intangible asset value and associated amortisation in the Consolidated Income Statement for each transaction carried out.

EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
The liability attaching to employee benefits is as follows:

Current liabilities
Non-current liabilities

Total

2017
£000

2,235
10,481

12,716

2016
£000

2,169
20,781

22,950

Whilst the liability relates to both the UK and Swiss defined benefit pension plans, its composition is dominated by the UK plan. The year-on-year 
decrease in the deficit amounts to £10.2 million. This was mainly caused by the positive changes in the returns on asset performance, liability 
experience gains and minor changes in the demographic assumptions offset by a decrease in the liability discount rate assumption from 2.7%  
to 2.4%.

CASH FLOW
Net cash flow from operating activities
During the year, net cash flow from operating activities increased by £10.6 million from £32.6 million to £43.2 million. The key drivers of the 
positive cash flow generation are shown in the table below.

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax for the year
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment
Net finance cost
Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment
Share-based payments
Working capital changes

Cash generated from the operations
Interest paid
Tax paid
Pension contributions

Net cash from operating activities

2017
£000

2016
£000

40,719
5,845
665
(45)
1,218
(6,108)

54,510
(761)
(8,388)
(2,164)

43,197

38,179
5,276
966
(15)
1,239
(1,998)

43,648
(1,133)
(7,703)
(2,171)

32,641

Cash generated from operations increased year on year by £10.6 million driven by profit before tax, an improvement in working capital and an 
increase in amortisation resulting from the acquisitions in 2017. To offset these cash inflows, there was an increase in the tax payment during  
the year of £0.7 million.

16

 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING AND FINANCING ACTIVITIES
The table below summarises the cash flow movements arising from investing and financing activities during the year. The overall net cash 
outflow from the two activities was £60.4 million, with the two main factors being the payment of dividends and the acquisition consideration 
and associated fees, largely related to Domus.  

Cash flows from investing activities
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
Interest received
Acquisition of subsidiary, net of cash and debt acquired and repaid
Acquisition of property, plant and equipment

Net Cash from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Share movement
Net movement on borrowings
Dividends paid

Net cash from financing activities

2017 
£000

2016 
£000

190
576
(31,805)
(3,058)

(34,097)

401
752
–
(2,963)

(1,810)

(377)
(230)
(25,729)

(26,336)

(224)
(13,544)
(22,464)

(36,232)

NET DEBT
As detailed in the table below, Group net funds at the end of the year decreased by £17.3 million (32.9%), from £52.6 million to £35.3 million mainly 
as a result of the net cash outflows arising from operating, investing and financing activities outlined above.

Cash at bank and in hand
Bank overdraft
Debt due within one year
Debt due after one year

At
1 January
2017
£000

59,343
(4)
(224)
(6,493)

52,622

Cash  
flows
£000

Translation
differences
£000

At
31 December 
2017
£000

(17,240)
4
–
230

(17,006)

(73)
–
(9)
(256)

(338)

42,030
–
(233)
(6,519)

35,278

FUNDING AND GOING CONCERN
The Company increased its existing UK banking facilities by a further £25.0 million on 8 December 2017. The increased facility was equally split 
across the two separate agreements the Company has in place with Barclays Bank PLC and HSBC Bank Plc. The increased banking arrangements 
retain the original terms and end dates of 14 December 2021. The Sterling committed facilities increase from £47.5 million to £72.5 million, with 
maintained Euro facilities of €8.6 million. The Company also has short-term uncommitted facilities which amount to £25.0 million, and are 
renewable on an annual basis. In addition, the Company has existing facilities of £7.8 million in Continental Europe. 

The Company maintains sufficient banking facilities to fund its operations and investments, and as at 31 December 2017, 94.0% of the total 
facilities were undrawn as shown below.

Less than one year
Over one year and less than five years

Drawn
£000

233
6,519

6,752

Undrawn
£000

32,343
73,369

105,712

Total facility
£000

32,576
79,888

112,464

Having reviewed the Company’s resources and a range of likely outcomes, the Board believes there are reasonable grounds for stating that the 
Company has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for a period no shorter than 12 months from the date of this Financial 
Review and it is appropriate to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the Company’s financial accounts.

Chris Payne
Chief Financial Officer

6 March 2018

17

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Our Marketplace

HEADLAM’S MARKET-LEADING CORE BUSINESS  
IS PREDICATED ON SUPPLING A HIGH VOLUME  
OF SMALL VALUE ORDERS INTO BOTH THE 
RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL SECTORS

There are few officially recognised statistics 
specifically covering the UK and Continental 
European floorcoverings markets but one 
estimate puts the value of the UK market for 
2017, expressed by reference to manufacturer’s 
selling price, at £1.95 billion (Source: AMA). 

Key components contributing to the size of the 
UK market are:

•  General maintenance, repair and 

refurbishment cycle – Qualitative data 
suggests that the residential end-consumer 
changes their flooring approximately every 
10 years, the refreshment typically relating 
to one room at a time;

•  Aged property profile within both the 

residential and commercial sectors – 76% of 
housing stock in England was built before 
1980, 20% before 1919 (Source: UK 
Government, Department for Communities 
and Local Government);

•  Under-investment in existing housing stock 
in both the public and private sector – In 
2015, 19% of all residential dwellings in 
England failed to meet the Decent Homes 
Standard (Source: UK Government, 
Department for Communities and Local 
Government); 

•  Health and Safety regulations supporting 
Repair, Maintenance and Improvement 
(‘RMI’) spend in the commercial sector; and

•  General consumer perception and 

economic environment.

New build construction is not considered to 
materially contribute to the prevailing market 
size as in recent years the UK has recorded 
modest new build construction numbers. In 
2015 and 2016, annual new build dwelling 
completions in England accounted for only 
0.6% of total dwellings (Source: UK 
Government, Department for Communities 
and Local Government).

An increase in construction activity, to increase 
housing stock undersupply issues for example, 
would provide an additional market growth 
catalyst. Likewise, consumer confidence and 
increased housing transactions augment 
growth rates due to the likelihood of several 
rooms being refurbished simultaneously within 

a property rather than being phased over time 
or delayed until a necessity.

Headlam’s total revenue split between the 
residential and commercial sectors is believed 
to reflect the overall revenue split in the UK 
market, and has remained fairly constant in 
recent years at approximately two-thirds 
residential and one-third commercial. The 
Company’s revenue from Continental Europe is 
more weighted towards commercial than the 
UK due to the Company’s French business’s 
social housing refurbishment activity.

Headlam’s market-leading core business is 
predicated on suppling a high volume of small 
value orders into both the residential and 
commercial sectors, with the Company’s 
principal customers being independent retailers 
and flooring contractors. As at 31 December 
2017, the Company had 67,807 active customer 
accounts within the core business, of which 
approximately 75% were in the residential 
sector reflecting the bias towards  
residential revenue.

The average floorcoverings requirement and 
order in the residential sector is significantly 
smaller than the commercial equivalent, and 
this in conjunction with the Company’s core 
product range being largely within the low to 
middle-end of the market in terms of price 
points means the Company’s average order 
value is proportionately low thereby 
representing a comparatively more affordable 
purchase compared to other RMI expenditure. 

The Company processed 5.5 million orders in 
2017 of which only 5% were full roll orders, with 
the vast majority of the Company’s orders 
requiring preparation before delivery. This 
includes ‘cut length’ or ‘pack’ orders whereby 
the rolls of carpet and vinyl and boxes of 
palletised goods are cut to length or broken-
down to satisfy the customer’s specific order 
requirement. The predominance of cut length 
orders, as opposed to full roll orders, again 
reflects the small orders and residential bias  
to the Company’s revenue, with this revenue 
segment generating higher gross margins  
for the Company.

18

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

AVERAGE ORDER VALUE (2017)

Company

£133

UK

£124

Continental 
Europe

£226

Residential 
sector

£121

Commercial 
sector

£133

Residential 
sector

£186

Commercial 
sector

£284

£135

Carpet  
(cut order)

£72

Vinyl  
(cut order)

£105

Other

The Company’s core market-positioning 
provides a degree of robustness and protection 
from weaker markets as the financial 
performance is typically based on many small 
orders and is not reliant on either key seasonal 
discounted sale periods or end-consumer 
credit, often used to subsidise and create 
demand for more expensive purchases. In 
addition, demand for floorcoverings tends to be 
inelastic to price increases in an inflationary 
environment due to the relative infrequency of 
purchases by the end-consumer; order values 
being relatively modest when compared to 
other RMI expenditure; and the large variety of 
product catering to every price point. The 
regular stream of new collections entering the 
market assists with the competitive positioning 
of product and ultimately helps maintain 
affordability in inflationary environments, with 
suppliers re-engineering their products to 
maintain price points.

Constant technical innovation, improved 
materials and design trends helps create strong 
ongoing demand for floorcoverings. Driven by 
the demand for hard flooring, and following 
significant investments in technology and 
manufacturing processes, LVT (‘luxury vinyl tile’) 
is the fastest growing product category being 
durable, warm under foot and offering realistic 
stone, wood and ceramic effects. Likewise, 
advances in yarn technology have resulted in 
softer polypropylene and polyester ranges. 

Independent retailers and flooring contractors 
comprise the vast majority of the Company’s 
customer base and accounted for almost 90% 
of the Company’s UK revenue in 2017. The 
Company’s performance over recent years 
coupled with anecdotal evidence suggests that 
this segment of the customer base has been 
growing and gaining market share, in particular 
independent retailers who are thought to hold 
an approximate 60% share of the UK 
floorcoverings market. In the last few years,  
the Company’s active customer accounts within 
the residential sector has grown steadily with the 
Company’s UK residential sector revenue 
growing 27% between 2012 and 2017, far 
exceeding the estimated overall UK 
floorcoverings market growth of 15%  
(Source: AMA).

The Independent Retailer

The success of the independent retailer in the floorcoverings 
market is in marked contrast to the fortunes of independent 
retailers in many other markets, and the Company’s business 
model and customer service proposition is centred on 
supporting and assisting their growth through:

•  Mitigating their need to hold stock with next-day and ‘just 
in-time’ delivery – allowing smaller premises and lower–
overheads;

•  Providing a comprehensive product range which is 

frequently refreshed;

•  Providing Point of Sale (‘POS’) materials and new product 

training when necessary to assist with marketing;

•  Dedicated sales representative relationships, frequent 
visits and sophisticated CRM app to assist account 
management; and 

•  Provision of credit.

19

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Our Business Model

OUR EXCEPTIONAL SUPPLIER AND CUSTOMER PROPOSITION 
AND MARKET–LEADING POSITION CREATES VALUE FOR 
STAKEHOLDERS AND PROVIDES FOR GROWTH THROUGH 
RE-INVESTMENT INTO THE BUSINESS

WHAT WE DO:

SUPPLIERS

Global manufacturing 
supply base, covering 
multiple product categories

Exceptional supplier and 
customer proposition

Suppliers

Customers

Unparalleled 
route to market 
for products

Broadest product 
offering 
supported by 
excellent 
customer service

CUSTOMERS
Most extensive customer base in 
the UK and Continental Europe, 
comprising principally 
independent retailers and 
flooring contractors

20

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

WHAT WE DO:

HOW WE DO IT:

CREATING 
SUSTAINABLE VALUE:

GROWTH THROUGH 
RE-INVESTMENT:

OUR COMPETITIVE 
ADVANTAGE MAKES 
HEADLAM THE PARTNER 
OF CHOICE:

•  ‘Global to local’
•  Extensive market reach
•  Highly experienced and 

knowledgeable 
management teams

•  Lasting relationships with 
suppliers and customers

•  Operational scale
•  Financial strength

CREATING VALUE FOR 
THE BENEFIT OF ALL 
OUR STAKEHOLDERS:

•  Highly cash generative
•  Leveraging market-leading 

position

•  Ongoing capex and opex 

investment

•  Continued expansion and 

optimisation of the 
distribution network
•  Progressive ordinary 

dividend policy

SUPPORTING THE 
FUTURE DEVELOPMENT 
AND SUCCESS OF OUR 
COMPANY:

•  Continue growing the core 
business through organic 
growth, bolt-on acquisitions 
and product expansion

•  Diversification and 

increased breadth into 
complementary market 
segments through  
targeted M&A

•  Investment in the network
•  Investment in people, the 
working environment and 
culture to attract and retain 
the best people

21

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Our Strategic Pillars

WITH THE STRATEGIC AIM OF CREATING 
VALUE FOR THE BENEFIT OF ALL 
STAKEHOLDERS

  GROWTH

  CUSTOMERS

  DYNAMIC MODEL 

•  Continue growing market-

•  Customer service and 

satisfaction at core of the 
business model

•  Position at the forefront 
for another 25 years –  
‘the partner of choice’

•  Expand offering and 

•  Build the distribution 

customer base - support 
their growth through 
reciprocal relationship

•  Evolution and innovation 
to respond to evolving 
demands 

channel model – 
indispensable part  
of the chain 

•  Continually appraise 

opportunities to ultimately 
reward all stakeholders

leading core business

•  Diversify and broaden 
overall position in the 
industry

•  Accelerate growth through 
M&A (product, geography, 
segment)

22

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

   MARGIN 
IMPROVEMENT

   CULTURE 
& ETHOS

•  Optimise the distribution 
network and processes

•  Focus on culture to attract 
and retain the best talent

•  Leverage scale to increase 
returns and operational 
gearing

•  Invest in people through 
training, support and 
working environment

•  Pursue multiple efficiency 
initiatives (incremental 
and larger)

•  Common purpose and 
aligned goals to deliver 
success

“Between 2013, the year I became Chairman, and 2017, the  
Company has grown revenue and underlying profit before tax 
by 17.4% and 63.1% respectively, and paid and declared total 
dividends of 114.85 pence per share (in respect of the five 
years). The fantastic achievement is testament to the hard 
work, commitment and endeavour of all our employees 
across the UK and Continental Europe.”

Dick Peters
Non-Executive Chairman

23

CREATE VALUE FOR THE BENEFIT OF ALL STAKEHOLDERSHeadlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Key Performance Indicators

The Board believes the Key Performance Indicators (‘KPIs’) below provide a comprehensive and relevant list of measurements 
with which to assess the Company’s financial, operational and social performance towards the achievement of its  
Strategic Pillars. 

Measurement

Why it’s important

2017 Performance 

Initiatives and actions 
for improvement

FINANCIAL

Like for like 
revenue* growth 

Year on year revenue 
growth as a % adjusted to 
normalise currency, 
businesses making a full 
year’s contribution and 
consistent working days 

Allows a consistent measure of year 
on year performance

1.0%
2016: 4.1%

Organic growth focus for 
regional businesses and 
universal product coverage

Gross profit 
margin

Measured as a % of 
revenue

Shows the effectiveness of gross 
profit generation from revenue

31.1%
2016: 30.6%

Pricing discipline and 
product expansion

Underlying** 
operating profit 
margin

Measured as a % of 
revenue

Shows the effectiveness of 
sustainable operating profit 
generation from revenue

6.2%
2016: 5.9%

Margin improvement 
initiatives 

Basic earnings 
per share (‘EPS’)

Profit after tax divided by 
average weighted 
number of shares

Demonstrates the level of profit per 
share attributable to the shareholders

39.1 pence
2016: 36.8 pence

In line with profit 
performance

Return on capital 
employed 
(‘ROCE’)

Measured as EBIT as a % 
of capital employed

Demonstrates the relative level of 
profit generated by the capital 
employed

26.2%
2016: 26.9%

Underlying** 
operating cash 
from operations

Measured as a % of 
EBITDA

109.8%
2016: 94.2%

Cash conversion measures the 
success of the Company in converting 
operating profit (measured as 
EBITDA) to cash, which underpins the 
quality of the Company’s earnings and 
reflects the effectiveness of working 
capital management

May be offset in the short 
term by infrastructure 
investment, for example on 
Ipswich distribution centre 
development

Should be held above 90% 
to ensure profit growth is 
cash generative. It is 
anticipated that 
improvements in inventory 
turn (see KPI below) will also 
lead to improvements in 
cash conversion %

Measured as a % of 
Revenue

Shows how effective the Company is 
at converting gross profit into 
operating profit

24.9%
2016: 24.7%

Maintain cost control to 
ensure increases remain 
below revenue growth

Underlying** 
selling,  
general and 
administrative 
(‘SG&A’) costs 

24

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Measurement

Why it’s important

2017 Performance

NON-FINANCIAL

Inventory turn 

Annual ratio measured by 
comparing cost of goods 
sold during the financial 
period with the average 
annual inventory level 
(using averaged data 
points at 1 January, 30 
June and 31 December)

A higher inventory turn is an indicator 
of efficient revenue generation, 
reduced risk of inventory 
obsolescence and more effective 
utilisation of distribution centre 
capacity

3.8x
2016: 3.9x

Employee 
retention 

74.0%
2016: 74.0%

Retention measures the 
ability to retain 
employees in the current 
year compared to 
previous years. 

Measured as a 
percentage of employees 
retained in the Company 
between 1 January and 
31 December

Retention demonstrates the 
Company’s ability to retain 
employees. The Company’s 
medium-term objective is to further 
develop a cultural ethos which 
attracts and retains the best talent in 
order to ensure valuable workforce 
knowledge is retained to support 
delivery of the strategic objectives 
and reduce the substantial costs 
involved in hiring and training 
employees

Reportable 
incidents 
(‘RIDDOR 
Reports’)

Reporting of Injuries, 
Diseases and Dangerous 
Occurrences Regulations 
2013. These regulations 
require employers, the 
self-employed and those 
in control of premises to 
report specified 
workplace incidents

By measuring reportable injuries, can 
benchmark and identify any 
deficiencies in the Company’s 
processes, allowing continuous 
improvement in H&S standards in the 
pursuit of excellence

25
2016: 17

Initiatives and actions 
for improvement

Moving from a manual 
reordering system to a 
computerised reordering 
algorithm in order to 
optimise the level of 
inventory held, match 
revenue demand with 
inventory availability, 
ensure excess inventory 
positions are minimised and 
supplier ordering is 
structured, inventory 
requirements 
communicated to fit in with 
supplier production 
schedules and deliveries 
scheduled to ensure 
adequate availability

Further develop employee 
engagement;
Introduce people strategies 
based on insight gathered 
from the employee 
engagement survey; and
Identify future skills gaps 
and implement learning 
strategies

Writing Safe Systems of 
Work with effect Q1 2018 to 
improve training standards, 
and additionally increase 
frequency of in-house H&S 
visits to identify and limit 
failures in compliance

*  Like-for-like revenue is calculated based on constant currency from activities and businesses that made a full contribution in both the 2017 

and 2016 periods and is adjusted for any variances in working days

**  Before non-underlying items being intangibles amortisation relating to businesses acquired, acquisitions fees and non-recurring costs 

relating to personnel changes 

25

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Risk Management and Principal Risks & Uncertainties

MANAGING OUR RISKS
During the year the Board carried out a robust assessment of the 
financial risks facing the Company, including those that would threaten 
its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity.

The Company’s business, results and financial condition are 
influenced by a range of risks and uncertainties, a number of which 
remain beyond the control of the Board. 

The Board reviews key risks and controls and, whilst the following 
highlights some of the key risks that have affected or could affect the 
Company, it is not an exhaustive analysis of the threats that may affect 
or influence the conduct of the business.

In 2018 the Board has established a risk committee, chaired by the 
Company’s Chief Financial Officer, that will enable a more granular 
review of business risks. The committee will be made up of cross 
function and business leaders and will report back to the Board on 
detailed risks and mitigation plans on a quarterly basis.

Area of risk

Description

Potential Impact

Mitigation 

Market 
demand

Competitor 
risk

Technology

A significant proportion of the 
Company’s revenue arises from trade 
with independent retailers and flooring 
contractors. The activity levels within 
this customer base are determined by 
consumer demand created through 
residential property refurbishment or 
moves, new residential housing 
developments and a wide range of 
commercial refurbishment and 
building projects.

The Company operates across four 
geographical markets, each of which 
has a number of similar trading 
characteristics. Within each market, 
the Company competes directly with a 
variety of regional and national 
distributors and manufacturers selling 
directly to its customer base and 
indirectly with multiple retail chains.

The IT system is a vital component of 
the Company’s operating strategy, 
underpinning the delivery of 
operational objectives and providing 
the framework for the maintenance of 
financial control. 

People

The Company’s ability to deliver 
continued success is very dependent 
upon its people.

Employee 
benefits

The costs associated with funding the 
Company’s defined benefit plans 
continue to be affected by the volatility 
in investment returns, bond yields, 
inflation and an improving mortality 
trend. 

Periods of economic recession that 
create reduced consumer 
confidence or contraction in the 
construction industry and changes 
in trends and preferences all have 
the potential to affect market 
activity and demand for products 
supplied by the Company. 

The emergence of a competitor 
with a strong business model could 
undermine the Company’s growth 
objectives.

Given its importance, any 
prolonged system failure has the 
potential to adversely affect 
business performance.

Market activity is monitored daily in each individual 
business and collectively at Company level. This 
visibility allows prompt response to factors 
adversely affecting trading. Furthermore, since 
the Company’s principal activities are supply and 
distribution, the Company has the ability to react 
quickly to market changes. In addition, the 
development of a range of regional, national and 
specialist businesses provides the Company with 
broad market penetration and the capability to 
manage the downside risk arising from a market 
contraction.

The Company seeks to sustain its competitive 
position by maintaining close relationships with its 
supplier and customer base. Substantial and 
continued investment in management and 
facilities, an extensive product offering, a 
knowledgeable selling resource, product 
availability, IT, efficient material handling and 
logistics enables the Company to continue to 
improve its market leading position.

Each business has its own dedicated IT 
infrastructure and failure in one will not interrupt 
another. Furthermore, the Company operates well 
defined backup procedures and has contingency 
plans in place to enable swift recovery from a 
failure of this nature.

An inadequate pool of suitably 
qualified and motivated people can 
disrupt business development and 
undermine the Company’s ability 
to deliver sustainable growth.

Recruitment, training and development are aimed 
at ensuring the Company has suitably skilled and 
qualified people to meet the current and future 
operational needs of its businesses. Furthermore, 
the Company is committed to driving employee 
engagement through direct communication, 
listening groups and employee champion forums.

The Company operates defined 
benefit plans in the UK and 
Switzerland. As at 31 December 
2017, the Company’s pension 
deficit was £12.7 million with the 
vast majority being the UK plan. An 
increase in the plan deficit could 
require the Company to increase 
the deficit reduction contributions. 

As a result of an agreed deficit reduction plan in 
2015, the Company makes deficit reduction 
contributions of circa £2.2 million in 2017 rising  
by 3.3% each 1 January, with a view to eliminating 
the shortfall by 30 April 2019. The Company’s most 
recent valuation of the UK plan as at 31 December 
2017 showed a significant reduction in the 
valuation deficit.

Legislation 
and regulation

The Company’s operations are 
regulated by a variety of laws and 
regulations, the principal ones relating 
to health and safety, the environment, 
employment, commerce, corporate, 
financial reporting and taxation. 

Failure to comply could cause 
reputational harm and lead to 
serious civil or criminal 
proceedings, causing disruption to 
the Company’s operations and 
leading to financial loss.

The Company manages its obligations through a 
framework of set policies and procedures and, 
where appropriate, engages the services of 
competent third–party advisers.

26

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Viability Statement

The UK Corporate Governance Code requires the Board to assess the 
prospects of the Company over a period in excess of the 12 months 
required by the ‘Going Concern’ provision. 

After analysing various options, a period of three years, to December 
2020, was chosen for the purpose of the viability assessment, in line 
with the Company’s rolling three-year strategic plan normally used to 
evaluate liquidity. This period also allows for modelling of capital 
investments planned during the time frame. Due to the current 
macroeconomic uncertainty in the UK and Continental Europe, the 
Board believed an assessment over a longer time period would 
incorporate a high degree of inherent uncertainty.

Reporting on the Company’s viability requires the Board to consider 
those principal risks that could impair the solvency and liquidity of the 
Company. In order to determine those risks the Board considered the 
Company-wide principal risks:

•  Market demand
•  Competitor risk
•  Technology
•  People
•  Employee benefits
•  Legislation and regulation

In light of the Company’s competitive position in its geographical 
markets, the Board considered it unlikely that any of the individual 
risks, other than market demand, would compromise the Company’s 
viability.

With reference to market demand the Board considers that the key 
risk arises from periods of economic recession that create reduced 
consumer and business confidence leading to a reduction in 
consumer demand created through residential property 
refurbishment or moves and new residential housing development 
and a wide range of commercial refurbishment and building projects.  
A contraction in demand triggered by these events will inevitably 
cause a fall in demand for the Company’s products. As a result, two 
alternative downside scenarios were modelled:

SCENARIO A – RECESSIONARY ENVIRONMENT
Scenario A is modelled on the basis that there is a sustained 
recessionary environment in both the UK and Continental Europe 
throughout the period of the viability assessment, such that revenues 
decline whilst there remain ongoing inflationary cost pressures.

SCENARIO B – ECONOMIC CRISIS
Scenario B is modelled on the basis that there is a similar economic 
and financial crisis to that observed during the second half of 2008 
through to 2012. The Board has utilised its experience of the trading 
environment in that period. This scenario assumed there is significant 
double digit decline in revenues in the period of the viability 
assessment.

Consideration was also given to the plausibility of the occurrence of 
other individual events that in their own right could have a material 
impact on the Company’s viability. None of these events was 
considered plausible.

The scenarios modelled are hypothetical and extremely severe for the 
purpose of creating outcomes that could have the ability to threaten 
the viability of the Company. However, based on the consolidated 
financial impact of the scenario analysis and associated mitigating 
actions that are either in place or could be implemented, the Board has 
been able to conclude that the Company will be able to operate within 
its existing bank covenants and maintain sufficient bank facilities to 
meet its funding needs over the three-year assessment period. In 
coming to this conclusion, it has been assumed that the Company’s 
UK bank facilities, recently extended on 7 December 2017, through to 
31 December 2020, will continue in existence.

CONFIRMATION OF LONGER TERM VIABILITY 
Based on the results from these scenarios, and having considered the 
available mitigating actions, the Board has a reasonable expectation 
that the Company will be able to continue in operation and meet its 
liabilities as they fall due over the period to 31 December 2020. This 
longer-term assessment process supports the Board’s statements on 
both viability and going concern.

27

M O R E

S E R V I C E

In 2017, 5.5 million customer orders 
were processed and delivered utilising 
a fleet of 404 commercial vehicles. 
Almost 9% of orders were placed 
on-line, with strategies in place to 
grow this percentage. 

29

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Corporate Responsibility

WE REMAIN COMMITTED TO MANAGING OUR 
COMPANY IN A SOCIALLY RESPONSIBLE WAY, 
CONTINUALLY REVIEWING OUR PERFORMANCE  
IN ALL AREAS OF CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY

Introduction to Corporate Responsibility

We have undertaken further investment in 
people and training during 2017 and 2018, most 
notably in the areas of Human Resources (‘HR’) 
and Health & Safety (‘H&S'), expanding our 
teams and updating our policies and procedures 
to strive for the highest standards in all areas 
of our operations.

Our ambition is to embed Corporate 
Responsibility within the Company’s culture 
with an ethos of supporting all stakeholders 
and upholding the highest standards to 
support the continued growth and success of 
the business.

Dick Peters
Non-Executive 
Chairman

Steve Wilson
Chief Executive

We remain committed to managing our 
Company in a socially responsible way, 
continually reviewing our performance in  
all areas of Corporate Responsibility, and  
were delighted during 2017 to become a 
constituent of the FTSE4Good Index. 
Launched by the global index provider FTSE 
Russell, the FTSE4Good Index Series is 
designed to identify companies that 
demonstrate strong environmental, social 
and governance (‘ESG’) practices, measured 
against globally recognised standards.

A key constituent of our Corporate 
Responsibility is the relationships with our 
stakeholders, encompassing employees; 
suppliers; customers; investors; and the 
communities in which we operate. These 
relationships, many of which span the 
25 years we have been operating, are of 
paramount importance and pivotal to our 
performance and we are committed to 
continuing the investment in these 
relationships to promote and ensure their 
longevity. We endeavour to have a positive 
impact on all our stakeholders with the 
strategic aim of creating value for the benefit 
of all stakeholders whilst supporting the 
end-consumer by providing an exceptional 
package of goods and services.

30

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Stakeholder Engagement

THE COMPANY CONSIDERS THE ONGOING 
ENGAGEMENT AND EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 
WITH ALL ITS STAKEHOLDERS TO BE OF 
SIGNIFICANT IMPORTANCE

INTRODUCTION
The Company considers the ongoing 
engagement and effective communication 
with all its stakeholders to be of significant 
importance, and it is undertaken in various 
forms throughout the year to provide the 
necessary support to each audience. 

surveys in the past involving a small cross-
section of the customer base, the Company 
will engage with a larger proportion of the 
customer base through surveys during 2018. 
In addition, sales managers and directors 
regularly visit customers to ensure they are 
content with the service received.

EMPLOYEES
Employee communication and engagement is 
undertaken via formal and informal meetings, 
presentations, regular emails and bulletins, use 
of notice boards, and the Company’s website 
and intranet. Conducted at both Company and 
individual business level, subjects include H&S 
and HR matters, updates to policies and 
procedures, notable achievements, and 
commentary on financial and operational 
performance and strategic aims. During 2017, 
to expand its engagement channels, the 
Company conducted its first Employee Survey 
and initiated a monthly HR Bulletin. 

Executive Directors and members of the 
Senior Management team have ongoing 
dialogue and regular meetings with teams at 
each of the Company’s businesses. In addition, 
twice a year, the Chief Executive, Chief 
Financial Officer, Chief Operating Officer and 
Commercial Director conduct a tour of the 
Company’s locations to meet with 
management to discuss operational and other 
matters and obtain any feedback. The 
Company looks to foster an open and 
transparent environment and actively 
encourages all employees to provide feedback 
should they wish. Feedback is reflected upon 
and any actions duly taken and communicated.

CUSTOMERS
Customer engagement and interaction is 
mainly undertaken via the frequent visits by 
sales representatives and managers, 
telephonically with members of the customer 
service teams, and the delivery drivers. 
Customers’ successful operations and 
wellbeing are essential to the performance of 
the Company and any feedback is discussed as 
appropriate and used to improve and enhance 
the customer service proposition.
Having conducted customer satisfaction 

Many of the Company’s businesses offer open 
house or trade days several times a year, 
allowing customers to visit facilities and learn 
about any special offers and new initiatives, 
which may include product and POS 
innovations.

SUPPLIERS 
Engagement with suppliers is undertaken 
through regular contact by individuals at both 
the Company and individual business or 
location level, and by individuals holding 
various positions within the organisation.

Each of the Company’s distribution centres 
has autonomy to develop products in 
conjunction with approved suppliers that may 
better suit the country or region they operate 
in. The Company’s buyers work closely with 
suppliers, meeting with them on a regular basis 
at their showrooms and production facilities in 
addition to the Company’s premises.

SHAREHOLDERS AND ANALYSTS 
Ongoing interaction with shareholders and the 
wider investment community, including 
analysts and investors not currently holding 
shares in Headlam, is essential to their 
understanding of the Company; their ability to 
appraise the performance and management 
of the Company; and consideration of the 
Company as an investment proposition.

The Company strives to provide a clear, 
balanced and comprehensive level of 
information and written material. The 
Company maintains a corporate website which 
contains regularly updated regulatory and 
other information, including presentations 
used to update the investment community, 
and issues both statutory and non-statutory 
regulatory news announcements throughout 
the year to update on financial, operational and 

other matters. The Company offers its larger 
shareholders, either directly or via its broker, 
face-to-face meetings on a bi-annual basis  
at a minimum to present and discuss 
performance and other matters, and obtain 
any feedback. These meetings are hosted by 
several of the Executive Directors and the 
Company’s Director of Communications.  
The Company also hosts a briefing for 
analysts, arranged by the Company’s Financial 
PR and IR adviser, twice a year to coincide with 
the announcement of its half year and full year 
financial results to present and discuss the 
same matters. 

Meetings are periodically held at various of the 
Company’s locations to better illustrate the 
Company’s operations and aid understanding, 
and in early 2018 the Company hosted a 
Capital Markets Event for analysts and 
institutional investors at a Domus specification 
centre in London. Domus was acquired by the 
Company in December 2017 and the event 
was to provide a detailed overview of its 
operations and the strategic rationale for its 
acquisition, and it is anticipated that similar 
events will be held going forward. 

The Non-Executive Directors, including the 
Chairman, attend certain events and briefings 
during the year where shareholders are 
present in addition to the AGM, and the 
Board’s Non-Executive Directors are 
committed to facilitating a direct channel of 
communication with the Company’s larger 
shareholders to hear any views and concerns.

The Company actively seeks shareholder 
feedback, and feedback is collated by both the 
Company and its advisers, discussed at Board 
and senior management team level and 
considered in relation to all aspects of the 
Company and help inform its written and 
verbal communications. 

LOCAL COMMUNITIES 
The Company is committed to advertising and 
employing locally when it is able, soliciting 
feedback, and reacting positively to this 
feedback and any requests for its involvement 
including support of local events.

31

 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Our People

OF PRIMARY IMPORTANCE IS THE PROVISION  
OF A SAFE AND ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND 
WORKPLACE FOR EMPLOYEES, AND ONE WHERE 
THEY ARE ENCOURAGED TO PROGRESS

INTRODUCTION
Of primary importance to the Company is the 
provision of a safe and environmentally sound 
workplace for employees and visitors and one 
where employees are encouraged to progress 
and achieve their full potential. 

Both the H&S and HR teams was expanded 
during 2017, most notably with the 
engagement of a National Health & Safety 
Manager and People Director (see page 36 for 
further details on Health & Safety). A number 
of initiatives were launched by the HR team 
during the year to support the overall wellbeing 
of the Company’s employees, including:

•  Employee Assistance Programme
•  HR and employee relations support
•  Employee satisfaction survey
•  Monthly HR Bulletin
•  Occupational Health

TENURE, RECRUITMENT AND 
INTERNAL VACANCIES
The Company actively recruited in all 
departments throughout 2017 and the total 
number of employees grew year-on-year to 
2,427 as at 31 December 2017 (2016: 2,384). 
Recruitment is undertaken through a number 
of avenues including the Company’s own 
website, recognised job boards and, where 
appropriate, recruitment providers. The 
circulation of an internal vacancy list was 
introduced in December 2016 to give 
employees greater visibility of the vacancies 
available across the Company and encourage 
internal moves as a measure to retain talent 
and experience. This reflects the Company’s 
commitment to giving all employees the 
opportunity to progress their careers within 
Headlam, supported by ongoing training and 
development. It is the Company’s intention to 
supplement the level of training available to 
its employees over the coming years. 
Employee retention and tenure is a key metric 
for the Company and 39% of UK employees 
have been with the Company for 10 years or 
more, with 135 employees having been with 
the Company since its establishment in 1992. 

32

As is not uncommon in the sector, a high 
proportion of employee turnover is among 
those with less than six months’ service and 
the focus is on reducing this through 
improved recruitment, induction and 
onboarding practices. The Company 
employee retention metrics for 2017 and 
2016, and initiatives for improvement, are 
given within the Key Performance Indicators 
on page 24 of this Annual Report.

EMPLOYEE SURVEY 2017 
AND 2018
Headlam undertook its first employee survey 
in May 2017 with the aim of giving all UK 
employees the opportunity to express their 
views on a confidential basis and help identify 
areas for improvement. The survey was 
completed by 53% of employees, considered 
acceptable for a first survey, with an overall 
engagement score of 77%. 

Individual survey reports were provided to all 
the Company’s businesses, with workshops 
and action planning subsequently undertaken 
at both group and local level involving 
champions from all departments, with ideas 
and concerns discussed and actions agreed. 
Actions subsequently implemented include 
improvements to the physical working 
environment, efforts to improve internal 
communications, introducing local social and 
team events, job shadowing to create better 
understanding of different job functions, and 
modifications to some operational processes 
and CRM systems. The Company is 
committed to continuing and broadening 
these actions to improve the overall working 
environment and deliver a culture where all 
employees are confident their ideas and 
concerns are listened to and acted upon. To 
this end, the Company intends to hold 
another survey in May 2018 and is focused on 
improving the response rate, particularly in 
the departments of Transport and 
Warehouse, so it can better ascertain the 
views of all its employees.

EMPLOYEE 
ASSISTANCE PROGRAM
The Employee Assistance Program (‘EAP’) 
was introduced in November 2017 as a 
continuum to improving employees’ wellbeing 
and in response to employee feedback. 
Delivered via a company called LifeWorks, 
EAP is a confidential telephone and internet/
app-based service available to all employees 
and their immediate families providing advice, 
information and support on a range of issues 
spanning the categories of Work, Health, Life, 
Family and Money. It is designed to offer 
assistance and specialist support to 
employees and their families through difficult 
times should they need it.

COST OF LIVING PAY AWARD 
The cost of living award is designed to benefit 
employees through helping offset the effect of 
inflation and the rising cost of living. For 2017, 
the Company elected to award a cost of living 
increase of 2.0% to base salary to all its UK 
employees earning £42,500 or below. The 
Company has determined to award an increase 
of 2.0% for 2018 to all employees, with the 
exception of the Board and Senior Management 
team who elected not to receive it. In relation to 
its employees in Continental Europe, the 
Company followed local market practice for 
both 2017 and 2018.

EQUAL OPPORTUNITIES 
The Company is fully committed to upholding 
the principles of equal opportunities in 
employment and in the provision of our 
services. The Company’s policy is to ensure 
that no job applicant or employee, whether 
permanent, temporary, part time, fixed term, 
or former receives more or less favourable 
treatment on the grounds of gender, gender 
reassignment, sexual orientation, marital or 
civil partnership status, colour, race, 
nationality, ethnic or national origins, religion 
or belief, age, disability, pregnancy or 
maternity, or is disadvantaged by a provision, 
criterion or practice which cannot be shown 
to be justifiable. As the Company has 
businesses in Continental Europe, the 
policies are appropriate for the local areas of 

 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

operation. Consideration is given to 
applications for employment, having due 
regard to the particular aptitudes and abilities 
of the applicants and to the Company’s 
responsibilities under the Disability 
Discrimination Act. Where practicable, 
subject to the nature of the Company’s 
activities, employees who develop a disability 
during employment are given the opportunity 
to retrain for alternative employment within 
the Group. The policy applies equally to the 
treatment of the Company’s customers, 
suppliers and members of the public. 

Recruitment and selection criteria and 
procedures will ensure that potential and 
current employees are selected, promoted, 
trained and treated on an equal basis and  
that all individuals are treated with dignity  
and respect. 

Each individual associated with the Company, 
is individually responsible for implementing 
the Company’s commitment to the principle 
of equality. 

The Company will not tolerate acts of 
unlawful discrimination or harassment and all 
instances of such behaviour or alleged 
behaviour will be treated seriously, be fully 
investigated and may result in disciplinary 
proceedings (up to and including dismissal).

The Company’s recruitment, training and 
development processes are designed to 
ensure that it has suitably skilled and qualified 
employees to meet the operational needs of 
the business. The Company recognises that 
successful businesses need to deliver a good 
service and product which can only be done 
by developing, supporting and maintaining 
the right staff to provide this. The Company is 
committed to developing the potential of its 
people, offering opportunities for employees 
to develop and grow and periodically 
reviewing succession planning processes.

HUMAN RIGHTS
The Company is committed to improving  
its practices to combat slavery and  
human trafficking. 

It understands that the issue of slavery and 
human trafficking is a global issue and that no 
business sector will be able to eliminate or be 
free of slavery within their supply train without 
working collaboratively within its industry. 
The Company has a zero tolerance to slavery 
and human trafficking and will strive to 
eliminate any slavery and human trafficking 
found to be in its supply chain.

The Company sources an extensive range of 
floorcovering products including carpet, 
residential vinyl, wood, laminate, luxury vinyl 
tile, rugs, underlay and commercial flooring.  
In 2017, following the acquisition of Domus, 
the business of the enlarged Group 
diversified into ceramics and increased its 
presence in specification services. In 2017, 
the Company purchased from significant 
suppliers based in 16 countries. As for 2016,  
in 2017 over 90% of purchases were from 
suppliers in the EU.

The Company is committed to ensuring that 
there is no modern slavery or human 
trafficking in its supply chains or in any part of 
the business. This reflects the commitment 
to acting ethically and with integrity in all 
business relationships and to implementing 
and enforcing effective systems and controls, 
working towards ensuring that slavery and 
human trafficking is not taking place 
anywhere in the Company’s supply chains. 

As part of the Company’s initiative to identify 
and mitigate risk, representatives from the 
Company visit suppliers and inspect their 
manufacturing facilities. During 2018, the 
Company will maintain its regular schedule  
of overseas visits to ensure anti-slavery 
practices are being monitored, reviewed and 
maintained within the supply chain. Greater 
internal training will be given to relevant 
employees to help them investigate and 
identify slavery or human trafficking practices 
which are not acceptable. 

Further, systems will be put in place to:

• 

Identify and assess potential risk areas in 
the supply chains.

•  Mitigate the risk of slavery and human 

trafficking occurring in the supply chains.
•  Monitor potential risk areas in the supply 

chains.

•  Protect whistle blowers. 

The Company is committed to taking the 
necessary steps to ensure that slavery and 
human trafficking are not taking place in its 
businesses and seeks to gain transparency 
within the supply chain. Further information 
on activities will be made available on the 
Company’s website.

The Company is also committed to 
maintaining a safe and productive 
environment, free from harassment in which 
all individuals are treated with respect and 
dignity, and it expects all employees and 
individuals that work at its sites to follow 
health and safety policies and procedures and 
be free from substance abuse at all times.

ANTI-BRIBERY AND CORRUPTION
It is the Company’s policy to conduct all 
business in an honest and ethical manner. 
The Company takes a zero-tolerance 
approach to bribery and corruption and is 
committed to acting professionally, fairly  
and with integrity in all business dealings  
and relationships. 

The policy applies to all employees, directors, 
officers, agency workers, seconded workers, 
volunteers, interns, agents, contractors, 
external consultants, third-party 
representatives and business partners. 
Any individual who breaches the policy will 
face action, which in the case of employees 
could result in dismissal for gross misconduct. 
Any non-employee who breaches the policy 
may have their contract terminated with 
immediate effect. 

33

The Company continues to offer the opportunity for class 2 driver 
training to drivers where changes in business need require a heavy 
goods vehicle to be used. Additionally, transport managers and 
supervisors attended an Operator’s Licence Awareness Training 
course and received refresher training on a broad range of transport 
compliance during 2017. 

DIVERSITY
Further details on the Company’s diversity policy as required by DTR 
7.2.8AR is set out in the Corporate Governance statement on page 52. 
Headlam recognises and values highly the benefits of diversity in the 
workplace, and maintains a policy of employing the best candidates 
available in every position, regardless of gender, ethnic group or 
background, and is committed to fair and equal treatment. Where existing 
employees become disabled, it is the Company’s policy, wherever 
practicable, to provide continuing employment under normal terms and 
conditions and to provide training, career development and promotion 
wherever appropriate, and the Company gives full and fair consideration 
to applications for employment from disabled persons. 

As at 31 December 2017, the Company had 2,427 employees of which 
18% were female (2016: 17% female). 

Table showing gender diversity:

Employees

Male
Female

Number of employees 
at 31 December 2017

6
–

6

Directors

Senior 
managers 

Other 

1,735
408

Total 
employees

1,989
438 

248
30

278

2,143

2,427

During 2017, three females were appointed to the Senior Management 
Team, and post the year-end the Company appointed its first female 
Director to the Board.

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Our People continued

All employees and those working for the Company are expected to 
ensure that the interests of the business remains paramount at all 
times; be impartial and honest in the conduct of their official business; 
use the funds and resources of the Company to the best advantage of 
the Company, always ensuring value for money; not abuse their 
position of employment for personal gain or to benefit their family or 
friends; and not to seek advantage or further private business or other 
interests in the course of their official duties. 

It is strictly forbidden for an employee corruptly to accept any 
inducement or reward for doing or refraining from doing anything,  
in his or her official capacity, or corruptly showing favour, or disfavour 
in the handling of contracts. 

Gifts must be of an appropriate type and value depending on the 
circumstances and taking account of the reason for the gift. 
Employees are required to declare and keep a written record of all 
material hospitality or gifts given or received and are also required to 
submit all expenses claims relating to hospitality, gifts or payments  
to third parties in accordance with the Company’s expenses policy  
and record the reason for expenditure. All employees who are in 
contact with suppliers and contractors, and in particular those  
who are authorised to sign purchase orders, or place contracts  
for goods, materials or services, are expected to adhere to high  
professional standards. 

EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
Headlam encourages and supports the financial security of its employees 
and offers a number of benefits including opportunities for participation 
in the Company’s defined retirement benefit plans, the Headlam Group 
Pension Plan and the Government auto-enrolment National Employee 
Savings Trust, also providing death in service benefits through the 
Headlam Group Life Assurance scheme.

Additionally, the Company operates a HM Revenue & Customs approved 
Save-As-You-Earn share option scheme (‘SAYE’), a monthly savings 
scheme facilitating the purchase of shares in Headlam at a discount by 
eligible employees. The SAYE not only provides employees with a 
tax-efficient savings plan but additionally promotes a sense of ownership 
of the Company. During 2017, 941 eligible employees participated in the 
Company’s SAYE schemes, equivalent to 44% of the UK workforce.

TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
All employees are actively encouraged to take advantage of training 
and development opportunities available to them, and which are 
considered an important part of the Company’s strategy for success. 
In 2017, 247 UK employees attended training courses covering  
the areas of Health & Safety, People Management, Leadership, 
Communication and Selling and Influencing Skills. Additionally,  
the Company is proposing to launch a Sales Training Academy  
during 2018.

The Company utilises the services of an external driver training team 
for continuing professional competence training for its commercial 
vehicle drivers, and this team continues to deliver the Driver 
Certificate of Professional Competence (‘CPC’) training to all the 
Company’s commercial vehicle drivers to ensure that the statutory 
requirement of 35 hours’ CPC training for every driver over a five year 
period is achieved. In 2017, 408 drivers received CPC training via a 
course entitled ‘The Professional Drivers Day’. The same trainer also 
delivered the Safe Urban Driving Course to 55 individuals from specific 
Company locations to assist in achieving further FORS Silver 
accreditations in the future (see Environment section on page 38).  
The training course for 2018 is designed to, among other things, raise 
understanding of vulnerable road users and how the industry and road 
schemes influence the safety of all road users.

34

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

GENDER PAY GAP REPORT
In-line with the UK Government’s regulations introducing mandatory 
gender pay gap reporting, the Company has published its Gender Pay 
Gap Report on the GOV.UK website (www.gov.uk) and its own website 
(www.headlam.com). The Report available on the two websites fully 
complies with the legislation but, by way of a summary, as at 5 April 
2017 (the ‘snapshot’ date for all the data given) for the Company’s two 
legal entities required to report under the legislation (‘HFD’ and ‘MCD’) 
and for the ultimate holding company (‘PLC’) not required to report:

•  The Company’s overall median pay gap was lower than the  

 UK national average at 10.5%

•  The proportion of men and women receiving bonuses:

 – HFD – men 97%, women 98%
 – MCD – men 97%, women 96%
 – PLC – men 67%, women 71%

•  The bonus pay gap:

In HFD the bonus  
payment for a female is

In MCD the bonus  
payment for a female is

In PLC the bonus  
payment for a female is

Mean

Median

41.6% lower  
than a male

44.0% lower  
than a male

95.1% lower  
than a male

14.6% lower  
than a male

24.5% lower  
than a male

99.9% lower  
than a male

•  The proportion of men and women in each quartile of the 

Company’s pay structure:

HFD
88%

Upper

Upper middle

86%

Lower middle

82%

Lower

80%

12%

14%

18%

20%

0%

20%

40%

60%

80%

100%

Male

Female

MCD
89%

Upper

Upper middle

94%

Lower middle

82%

Lower

77%

11%

6%

18%

23%

0%

20%

40%

60%

80%

100%

Male

Female

PLC
100%

Upper

Upper middle

75%

Lower middle

0%

Lower

0%

0%

25%

100%

100%

0%

20%

40%

60%

80%

100%

Male

Female

The Company is working to improve the male: female ratio across the 
whole Company and, as detailed above, appointed three females to the 
Senior Management Team during 2017 and post the year-end appointed 
its first female Director to the Board. In addition, it is committed to 
improving the balance of the workforce through both supporting the 
women who work for the Company moving into more senior positions 
and attracting more women to join. 

GENERAL DATA PROTECTION REGULATION (GDPR)
The Company is in the process of ensuring that it will comply with the 
GDPR when it is implemented in May 2018. During the latter part of 2017 
the Company identified the data processing activities in which it is 
engaged and is liaising with all third parties (be they customers, suppliers, 
employees or other third parties) involved in those data processing 
activities (or who may be the subject of data processing) to ensure that it 
will be compliant whether as data controller or data processor by the 
relevant time. The Company will also be putting in procedures to ensure 
the safety and security of the data it holds and/or processes as well as 
implementing new policies and providing training to employees who are 
engaged in roles which require them to process personal data.

Geraldine Cooney,  
Commercial Manager
C.K. Davie (Aberdeen)

In 1998, Geraldine began working as a contract cleaner for one 
of Headlam’s Scottish businesses based in Glasgow. When the 
cleaning company Geraldine was working for went out of 
business, Headlam decided to employ her directly so she could 
continue in her cleaning role.

After 18 months, Geraldine was approached by the business 
asking if she would like to apply for an internal sales position as 
it was actively recruiting for sales people and given that 
Geraldine was a gregarious and well-liked member of the team, 
she was considered to be an ideal candidate. Having 
successfully applied, Geraldine began working on the sales 
desk during 2000 on a full-time basis and after eight years,  
was promoted to Sales Office Supervisor in 2008.

In 2012, Headlam acquired C.K. Davie, a business based in 
Aberdeen and Dundee, to enlarge its Scottish operations and 
Geraldine was asked if she would like to provide temporary 
cover to oversee the business during the weeks that followed 
the acquisition. After a few weeks in the cover role, Geraldine 
decided to ask if there was a permanent opening to manage 
C.K. Davie and if so, whether she could apply for the position.

To everyone’s delight, Geraldine was subsequently appointed 
Commercial Manager of C.K Davie in 2013, which is a position 
she has made her own, has made successful and continues to 
hold to the current day.

35

 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Health & Safety

THE HEALTH AND SAFETY OF EMPLOYEES AND 
INDIVIDUALS LIKELY TO BE AFFECTED BY THE 
COMPANY’S OPERATIONS IS TREATED WITH  
THE UTMOST IMPORTANCE

INTRODUCTION
The health and safety of employees and 
individuals likely to be affected by the 
Company’s operations is treated with the 
utmost importance. It is the Company’s policy 
to ensure that operations are carried out at all 
times in compliance with the relevant health 
and safety guidance in the jurisdictions in which 
it operates.

Health & Safety (‘H&S') is a standing agenda 
item at the Company’s Board meetings, with 
an associated report submitted, and regular 
presentations are made to the Board and the 
Senior Management team. The report covers 
accident statistics, progress on initiatives, 
transport audits, assessment visits, updates 
on policies and procedures, and any changes 
in legislation that could affect the Company 
and its businesses. It is intended that a 
comprehensive review of existing policies and 
procedures will be undertaken during 2018 
and presented to the Board for approval.

A Risk Committee (comprising the Chief 
Financial Officer, People Director, National 
Health & Safety Manager and Logistics & 
Compliance Director) serves as a governance 
body to provide oversight review and 
challenge of the risk management processes, 
and to confirm that appropriate and 
proportionate risk management procedures 
are in place. Investigations are carried out in 
respect of any accidents or matters 
warranting further detail.

Each of the Company’s businesses occupying 
distribution facilities has a H&S Committee 
comprising representatives from the various 
business departments. These meet on a 
periodic basis and report quarterly to the 
National Health & Safety Manager. 
Management teams are encouraged to create 
a supportive H&S culture and recognise the 
value of employee participation.

KEY FOCUSES OF 2017 
A focus of 2017 was the building of dedicated 
in-house H&S expertise. This will allow for 
more effective management of H&S, the 
implementation and tailoring of systems to 
meet the Company’s specific needs, and 
ultimately ensure that H&S becomes 
embedded in the Company’s culture and 
long-term practices. A National Health & 
Safety Manager and two Regional Health & 
Safety Advisers were appointed during 2017 
and 2018 to effectively cover the Company’s 
UK operating locations.

The new in-house team, working in 
conjunction with the existing outsourced 
provider, has already implemented a number 
of revised and improved policies and 
procedures. These include H&S compliance 
assessments being undertaken at all of the 
Company’s locations on a quarterly basis at a 
minimum, and all business managers with 
responsibility for H&S completing the 
Institution of Occupational Safety and Health 
(‘IOSH’) ‘Managing Safely’ training course with 
periodic refresher training as necessary. 
During the beginning of 2018, 80 business 
managers completed the IOSH ‘Managing 
Safely’ course, with additionally 25 members 
of the Company’s senior management 
completing the IOSH ‘Leading Safely’ course.

A new in-house Health & Safety Management 
System (that will ensure a consistent 
approach to risk assessments, safe systems 
of work, accident and near-miss reporting) is 
being launched in the first quarter of 2018 
and implemented across the Company. It is 
well-recognised that reporting near-misses 
can significantly improve worker safety while 
enhancing an organisation’s safety culture 
and induction procedures. The system will 
allow data to be immediately logged, analysed 
and any trends identified, with appropriate 
remedial action then taken. 

IOSH ‘Managing Safely’ course

80Business managers completed the 
25Members of the Company’s senior 

management completed the IOSH 
‘Leading Safely’ course

36AED units (‘Automated 

External Defibrillators’) were installed 
at the Company’s  larger depots
 in the UK in 2017

101

New commercial vehicles delivered  
with fall arrest systems in 2017

36

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Automated lone-working devices have recently 
been trialled at one site and will potentially be 
rolled out to other locations in 2018 where 
employees may be in a lone-working 
environment for a proportion of their time. The 
device provides a two-way communication with 
a monitoring station, with emergency 
assistance provided when necessary. 

KEY PRIORITIES 
With the aim of achieving excellence in H&S, 
and a clear vision for the future, the Company 
is undertaking a rigorous PDCA method 
(‘plan-do-check-act’) in 2018. Key priorities  
in the near to medium-term include continue 
growing the in-house expertise and systems, 
increase the regularity of visits to operating 
locations, and provide comprehensive 
ongoing training and support to all 
employees.

There were 25 reportable incidents in 2017, 
compared to 17 in 2016, none of which 
resulted in a serious injury or fatality. The 
uplift in reported incidents reflects the 
introduction of a more robust and enhanced 
reporting schedule in 2017. All reportable 
accidents are investigated and, in the 
infrequent instances where improvement is 
required, changes are implemented in a 
timely manner. There were no prosecutions 
for breaches of health and safety or 
enforcement actions in the year.

In-line with a commitment outlined in the 
2016 Annual Report, 101 new commercial 
vehicles were delivered in 2017 with fall arrest 
systems installed in the rear, and a further 
109 are scheduled for delivery in 2018. The 
fall arrest system, in conjunction with the 
body harness worn by the driver, is designed 
to prevent falls by drivers unloading from the 
vehicle. The Company intends to continue 
rolling out this initiative across its whole fleet 
as the fleet is renewed.

Fire risk assessment is undertaken across the 
Company on an annual basis. During 2017, to 
improve activity in this area and ensure the 
highest level of compliance going forward, 
the Company undertook to enhance its 
processes and training in the area of fire 
compliance. As such, a Fire Risk Management 
course and training was undertaken at the 
end of 2017, with Diplomas in Fire Protection 
and Prevention to be run later in 2018.

In 2017, AED units (‘Automated External 
Defibrillators’) were installed at the 
Company’s 36 larger depots in the UK, with 
people at each trained in their usage. These 
units are proven to be one of the most 
important tools in saving the life of someone 
suffering sudden cardiac arrest, and it is 
intended that units will be placed in the 
Company’s larger Continental Europe 
premises currently without them during 2018.

37

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Environment 

THE COMPANY IS COMMITTED TO IMPLEMENTING 
THE CORRECT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES 
RELATING TO THE SUSTAINABILITY OF THE 
ENVIRONMENT, AND MITIGATING ITS IMPACT  
ON THE ENVIRONMENT

organisation called VALPACK. VALPACK 
provides compliance services to its members 
by analysing the packaging waste data 
submitted by each member organisation on 
an annual basis and comparing it with 
comparative data in order to be able to 
confirm to the Environment Agency that its 
members (including the Company) are 
continuing to meet UK recycling and recovery 
standards.

Reflective of the Company’s commitment to 
recycling, Headlam was awarded a trophy for 
‘Longstanding Support’ at the Carpet 
Recycling UK Awards for Good Practice 2017. 
Carpet Recycling UK is a not-for-profit 
membership association working to increase 
the recycling of carpet waste across the UK, 
and Headlam is very proud to be a member 
and help increase awareness. According to 
Carpet Recycling UK, 168,000 tonnes of 
carpet was recovered in 2017 (for reuse, 
recycling or energy recovery) equivalent to a 
landfill diversion rate of 42%, a 7% increase 
on 2016 recovery, and showing strong 
progress towards their goal of 60% by 2020.

Within the UK, the Company seeks to ensure 
compliance with the Producer Obligations 
(Packaging Waste) Regulations 2007 (as 
amended). The Company is a member of an 

INTRODUCTION
The Company is committed to implementing 
the correct policies and procedures relating 
to the sustainability of the environment, and 
mitigating its impact on the environment. 
The Company endeavours to lead by example 
and provides the managers of its businesses 
with guidance on waste reduction, recycling 
and consumption of utilities. 

In general, and as part of its commitment to 
the environment, the Company is actively 
migrating away from paper-based systems to 
handheld paperless delivery and invoicing 
techniques. 

RECYCLING & WASTE
The waste arising from the Company’s 
operations is predominantly protective 
plastic packaging, cardboard poles and boxes, 
and wooden pallets. The cardboard poles 
from the centre of rolls and cut lengths of 
carpet and vinyl delivered to our customers 
are subsequently collected from their 
premises, with the Company providing a 
financial incentive to its drivers to do so. They 
are re-used until no longer fit for purpose and 
then recycled.

The Company continually seeks to increase 
the proportion of its waste it recycles, baling 
plastics and cardboard, and stacking 
unwanted pallets for dispatch to specialist 
reprocessing agents (when it is economic to 
do so), which has significantly reduced the 
quantity of waste going to landfill sites. 

The Company makes a concerted effort to 
utilise recycled materials wherever possible in 
its operations. The packaging film used for 
broadloom at the Company’s distribution 
hubs in Coleshill and Tamworth, and some 
other locations, is 100% recycled from used 
polyethylene. During 2018 more of the 
Company’s locations will utilise the same 
material, machinery permitting.

38

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

FLEET OPERATOR RECOGNITION 
SCHEME (‘FORS’)
The Fleet Operator Recognition Scheme 
(FORS) is a voluntary accreditation scheme 
that promotes best practice for commercial 
vehicle operators. FORS encompasses all 
aspects of safety, efficiency, and 
environmental protection by encouraging 
and training fleet operators to measure, 
monitor and improve performance. FORS 
operators demonstrate commitment to 
managing road risk, reducing environmental 
impact and improving operational efficiency, 
all of which improve overall fleet road safety 
and lessen the wider impacts of freight and 
fleet operations.

Six of the Company’s businesses locations 
have achieved and hold FORS Bronze 
accreditation, with an additional business 
holding FORS Silver. It is the Company’s 
ambition to add to this number of 
accreditations and progress up the 
membership levels as part of its commitment 
to achieving exemplary levels of best practice, 
and as FORS is rolled out nationwide beyond 
its original London focus.

FLEET 
European emission standards define the 
acceptable limits for exhaust emissions of 
new vehicles sold in EU and EEA member 
states with the aim of improving air quality 
across the European Union. All the 
Company’s new commercial and motor 
vehicles delivered since October 2014 have 
been compliant with the latest Euro 6 
emission standards despite it having only 
become binding from September 2015. 
Currently 285 vehicles within the commercial 
fleet are Euro 6 compliant, and with another 
75 commercial vehicles expected to be 
replaced during 2018, over 80% of the 
commercial fleet is expected to be Euro 6 
compliant by the end of 2018. 

The Company currently holds 12 operator 
licences, 11 of which have roadworthiness 
scores within the highest band (Green) under 
the Operator Compliance Risk Score (‘OCRS’) 
system developed by the Driver and Vehicle 
Standards Agency (‘DVSA’). The OCRS 
roadworthiness score is concerned with the 
condition of a vehicle and is generated by 
roadside inspections that are carried out by 
the DVSA. 

The Company is committed to assessing and 
improving the efficiency of its product 
delivery and limiting its vehicle emissions 
where possible.

PRODUCT SOURCING
As an importer of wood products from 
outside the EU, the Company has a procedure 
in place to comply with the requirements of 
the European Union Timber Regulations 
2013. It applies a due diligence process to 
mitigate the risk of illegally sourced timber 
within the supply chain process and as a result 
is able to compile a document trail confirming 
that the wood products are sourced from 
authorised and renewable supplies. As part of 
this procedure, the Company also makes 
enquiries to ensure that the manufacturers 
dealt with do not use child labour or exploit 
children and treat their workforce fairly. The 
Company will always visit a factory prior to 
making purchases to check its operating 
standards and capabilities.

UTILITIES
Water, Electricity and Gas
The Company monitors greenhouse gases 
on a consistent basis with the aim of 
improving its use of energy, water, recyclable 
and non-recyclable resources, ensuring 
long-term environmental and business 
sustainability and creating long-term value 
for shareholders and other stakeholders.

While the Company recognises its business 
can have a direct and indirect effect upon the 
environment, owing to the nature of its 
operations and proactive approach when 
planning and developing any new facilities, 
the Company believes that its activities 
generally have a low impact on the 
environment. There were no environmental 
legal or compliance issues arising during  
the year.

39

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Environment continued

Water
Water consumption arises predominantly in respect of employee 
welfare and commercial vehicle washing. The majority of water 
charges are in respect of water supplied and used. The Company 
encourages its drivers to keep the commercial vehicles clean and tidy 
and, to assist them, has a combination of jet wash machines and, at 
four of the largest distribution facilities, specialist truck washes. Each 
truck wash utilises 100% recycled water, helping with conservation, 
and environmentally friendly washing detergents.

Electricity
Electricity consumption continues to be predominantly in respect of 
forklift truck battery charging, the operation of specialist cutting 
tables used to cut lengths from full and part rolls of broadloom 
products, associated mechanical handling and compressed air 
equipment, office and warehouse lighting and office equipment. 
Modern and energy efficient construction techniques and products 
are incorporated when investing in new facilities or undertaking 
refurbishment or repair works.

Photovoltaic panels, installed on the roof of the Company’s Coleshill 
distribution hub, generate an estimated 46,000 kWh of electricity. 
Future construction projects will similarly incorporate intelligent 
lighting systems and, where practical, renewable energy solutions. 
The Company is progressively installing more energy efficient LED 
units when undertaking lighting repairs and replacement.

Gas
Gas is consumed predominantly in respect of office heating and very 
limited localised radiant heating above work stations on the cutting 
tables located within the distribution hubs and centres. Future savings 
in the consumption of electricity and gas have been identified through 
the installation of sophisticated heating control systems either in new 
facilities or during refurbishment works. Consideration will be given to 
installing such control systems in other premises if considered viable.

Electricity and gas supplies in the UK are purchased on a Company 
contract basis. The actual cost of electricity and gas in 2017 was 
comparable to prior years, and represented 0.13% of revenue.

40

CARBON REPORTING
The Company is required to report on all the measured emissions 
sources under The Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013. Data has been collected in 
accordance with the Carbon Reduction Commitment Energy 
Efficiency Scheme. Conversion factors for electricity, gas and fuel  
are those published by the Carbon Trust.

The Company seeks to reduce water consumption and charges by 
analysing invoices received in respect of water, through the installation 
of water meters and by reducing consumption through repair, renewal 
or installation of equipment to improve efficiency.

Electricity

Gas

Commercial vehicle fuel

Water consumption in 2017 of 32,112 cubic metres was consistent 
with each of the previous three years.

Car fuel 

Total 

Tonnes per £1 million revenue 

2017
CO2/ tonnes

2016
CO2/ tonnes

2015
CO2/ tonnes

2,736

783

18,004

4,853

26,376

37

3,457

1,052

19,597

4,780

29,540

45

4,348

1,010

18,153

4,603

28,114

43

2017 electricity emissions decreased due in part to the continuance of 
the Company-wide initiative to install more LED units, as described 
above, in heavily trafficked areas such as the dispatch bays. In addition, 
the official government conversion factor for electricity has reduced 
from 0.41205 to 0.35156 kg CO2/ kWh which in itself represents a 14% 
reduction. Electricity consumption across all Company sites (when 
aggregated) has reduced by 5.3%.

During 2017 an increased number of the Company’s vehicles were 
Euro 6 compliant with Euro 6 more than halving the amount of 
nitrogen oxides that a diesel vehicle can emit with a cap of 80mg/km. 

ENERGY SAVINGS OPPORTUNITY SCHEME (‘ESOS’)
ESOS is a mandatory energy assessment scheme for large 
organisations in the UK, an assessment for which was carried out by an 
external assessor in late 2015 to comply with the deadline of 
December 2015. Further audits are required every four years following 
and thus the next audit is not anticipated or required until December 
2019. Due to the mix of energy, with the majority related to transport 
fuel, the assessment comprised an audit of the energy used by the 
Company’s transport activities, there being no requirement to audit 
the energy consumed in respect of buildings and industrial processes. 

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Social Activities, Community and Charitable Donations 

THE COMPANY IS COMMITTED TO HAVING  
A POSITIVE IMPACT ON THE COMMUNITIES  
IN WHICH ITS BUSINESSES OPERATE

The Company is committed to having a 
positive impact on the communities in which 
its businesses operate and looks to support 
its local communities through employment, 
becoming involved in local events and 
fundraising activities, charitable donations, 
sponsorships of local teams and donations of 
floorcovering products for specific projects. 
The Company encourages its businesses to 
support local charitable organisations, 
providing assistance to do so, and also has a 
policy in place to match individual’s charity 
fundraisings under its Employee Donation 
Scheme and allow employees paid time off 
work to undertaken charitable duties. 

In early 2018, a member of the Board and two 
of the Senior Management team became 
members of The Worshipful Company of 
Furniture Makers (referred to as The Furniture 
Makers’ Company). The Furniture Makers’ 
Company, incorporating the Furnishing 
Trades Benevolent Association and one of 
the Livery Companies of the City of London, 
aims to promote, encourage and foster the 
craft and industry of furnishing and furniture 
and its ancillary activities in the United 
Kingdom, advance education in the industry, 
and relieve financial hardship of present and 
past employees of the industry, their families, 
relatives and dependents.

During March 2018, the Company will donate 
flooring to Sebastian’s Action Trust for their 
second purpose-built family respite facility 
being built in Berkshire. Sebastian’s Action 
Trust supports families of life-limited and 
seriously ill children and through its facilities 
offers respite holidays to very sick children 
and their families, enabling precious time to 
be spent together.

Charitable donations made during the year in 
support of charitable causes in local 
communities, nationally, and those of interest 
to employees amounted to £33,483 (2016: 
£20,180). In addition, employees participated 
in a variety of fundraising activities and 
supported charities local to their businesses.

While the Company does not support a 
specific charity or community it has been a 
member of the Pennies from Heaven payroll 
giving scheme since 2011 and matches the 
charitable donation made by its employees 
under the scheme. In 2017, the Company 
made an overall contribution of £10,098.68 to 
Pennies from Heaven on behalf of itself and 
its employees. 

In conjunction with the first employee survey 
held in 2017, the Company donated £5 on 
behalf of each employee who completed it, 
raising a total of £5,430 for the chosen 
charities of Cancer Research UK, Make-A-
Wish UK and Age UK.

41

M O R E

CHOICE

42

CHOICE

“Looking back on my time as a Non-
Executive Director of the Company, 
which has spanned twelve years, I am 
pleased to leave a legacy of a well-
managed and forward-looking Board 
with sound systems in place. I consider 
that the Board is well-equipped to take 
the Company forward for the benefit of 
all of its stakeholders.”

Dick Peters
Non-Executive Chairman

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Board of Directors and Senior Management Team

2

3

1

4

5

1. A J Aldridge  |  Non-Executive Director, Board  |  l ■ ▲
Amanda was appointed a Non-Executive Director in February 2018. Amanda 
was a partner in KPMG LLP from 1996 until 2017, when she retired from the 
partnership, having joined the firm in 1984 and qualified as a chartered 
accountant in 1987. She has significant experience as an external auditor, 
working predominately with quoted clients in the retail and distribution 
sectors. Amanda has also advised quoted companies on corporate 
transactions and the assessment and remediation of internal controls. She 
is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales.

4. A K Eastgate  |  Senior Independent Director, Board  |  l ■ ▲
Andrew was appointed a Non-Executive Director in May 2010. He is the 
Chairman of the Remuneration and Nomination Committees and Senior 
Independent Director. Andrew is a solicitor and was formerly a Partner in 
Pinsents, including being head of Pinsents’ corporate practice in Birmingham. 
Andrew has broad experience of advising quoted companies, particularly in 
connection with transactions and compliance issues, and is Chairman of 
Epwin Group Plc, the AIM listed manufacturer of low maintenance building 
products. He is also an experienced commercial mediator.

2. C E Miles  |  Director of Communications 
Catherine was appointed Director of Communications in January 2017. 
Catherine was previously Corporate Broking Director at the stockbroker 
Arden Partners, where she was an adviser to Headlam. Catherine worked in 
Corporate Broking for six years advising, and raising money for, a broad 
spectrum of public companies predominately in the small and mid-cap 
space. Prior to this she was Corporate Communications Director and 
Company Secretary at an AIM listed company, and initially worked in the 
Financial PR industry.

3. P J Lawrence  |  Non-Executive Director, Board  |  l ■ ▲
Philip was appointed a Non-Executive Director in June 2015. Philip is the 
Chief Executive of the Coal Authority, which on behalf of the Department  
of Business Energy and Industrial Strategy manages the effects of past  
coal mining, including subsidence damage claims, mine water pollution  
and other mining legacy issues. Prior to this, he held significant roles with  
Marconi plc and Deloitte & Touche. He is an Associate of the Institute of 
Chartered Accountants.

5. S G Wilson  |  Chief Executive, Board  |  ■
Steve was appointed Chief Executive in September 2016, having previously 
been the Group Finance Director, a position he had held since joining 
Headlam in 1991. Steve is a Non-Executive Director of Conviviality Plc, a UK 
wholesaler and distributor of alcohol and impulse products, and, until his 
retirement from their board in September 2010, was the Non-Executive 
Chairman of Synergy Health plc, which delivers outsourced services to 
healthcare providers. He is a fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants.

6. D A Price  |  Commercial Director 
Darryl was appointed Commercial Director in September 2016 assuming 
operational responsibility for the majority of Headlam’s UK businesses.  
Darryl joined the Company in February 1994 as Sales Office Manager at 
Thatcham before progressing to Operations Director. From 2003 to 2015, 
 he was the Commercial Director responsible for the businesses in Coleshill. 
In November 2015 he was appointed to the Senior Management Team 
assuming operational responsibility for an increased number of the UK 
businesses. Darryl has 24 years’ experience in the floorcoverings industry.

44

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Committees 
|  l Audit  ■ Nomination  ▲ Remuneration

6

8

10

7

9

11

7. R W Peters  |  Non-Executive Chairman, Board  |  l 
Dick was appointed Chairman in September 2013, having been appointed  
a Non-Executive Director in 2005. He is a Director and Chairman of Headlam 
Pension Trustees Limited, the corporate trustee for the defined benefit  
and defined contribution pension schemes. Dick was formerly Senior  
Partner for the East Midlands practice of Deloitte & Touche in Nottingham,  
and is a fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants. He has considerable 
experience of auditing large companies, both UK and overseas, transactional 
support and project management activities.

10. S L Ward  |  Company Secretary and Legal Counsel
Sarah was appointed Company Secretary in October 2017. Sarah brings  
a wealth of experience in corporate transactions, leasing and landlord 
relationships, planning and construction projects, and is a qualified solicitor. 
Sarah qualified as a corporate lawyer spending a number of years at 
Eversheds. She was then a partner and head of the Corporate Department  
at a top 100 national firm before moving to Bicester Village where she 
managed the legal function. Sarah joined Headlam from UK Power Reserve 
where she was General Counsel.

8. C R Payne  |  Chief Financial Officer, Board
Chris was appointed Chief Financial Officer in September 2017. Chris joined 
from Biffa plc, the UK integrated waste management company, where he  
was Group Commercial Finance Director with responsibilities including 
overseeing all the operational finance teams and divisional Finance Directors. 
Chris joined Biffa plc in 2013 and was previously at Mitie Group plc from 2008  
to 2013 where he held two divisional Finance Director positions. He is a 
qualified Chartered Accountant having trained with KPMG and is a fellow  
of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales.

11. A R Judge  |  Chief Operating Officer, Board
Tony Judge was appointed Chief Operating Officer in September 2016, and 
in March 2017 was appointed to the Board. Tony joined the Company in 1992 
as Managing Director of Florco, becoming the Commercial Director for the 
European businesses in 2000-2001, and in 2001 the Commercial Director  
of the Coleshill businesses. In 2005, he was additionally appointed Managing 
Director of the Tamworth businesses and took operational responsibility for 
the Thatcham and Stockport businesses in 2012 and Gildersome in 2015. 
Tony has 36 years’ experience in the floorcoverings industry.

9. S J  LaVerne  |  People Director
Sue was appointed People Director in October 2017. Sue joined from E.ON 
where she worked between 2009 and 2017 carrying out various commercial 
and international HR leadership roles, latterly as HR Director of the global 
customer solutions division. Sue started her career in retail with commercial 
and HR appointments including at Marks and Spencer and Arcadia Group.  
Sue has broad experience in all areas of HR and has contributed to external 
bodies, including as Chair of the Department for Work and Pensions employers 
steering group focused on giving more disabled people access to work

45

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Chairman’s Introduction to Governance

This has been a year of positive change at all of the senior levels of our business. At Board level, I am pleased that my own succession as Chairman 
has progressed smoothly, with Philip Lawrence taking over on 1 June 2018.

The Executive membership of the Board changed during the year with the appointment of Tony Judge, appointed in March 2017, as Chief 
Operating Officer and Chris Payne, appointed in September 2017, as Chief Financial Officer. We augmented the Board’s numbers following a 
search for a new independent Non-Executive Director which successfully concluded with the appointment of Amanda Aldridge on 1 February 
2018. Amanda will take over from Philip Lawrence as chair of the Audit Committee from 1 June 2018. In addition, we intend to recruit a further 
Non-Executive Director during the early part of 2018.

During the year we added to the Senior Management team with the appointment of a new Director of Communications and People Director and 
filled our vacant Company Secretary position. 

Against this backdrop of change, we have retained our view that good governance remains essential in order to deliver our strategic priorities,  
as well as supporting sustainable growth, an enhanced contribution to and from our stakeholders and ultimately protecting shareholder value. 
The Board’s commitment to this prioritisation has been reflected in the amount of time that it has supported the Executive Board members in 
their review of strategic, cultural and stakeholder issues (which are commented on further in this report).

Our Board evaluation this year was through an internal review process, further details of which are included on page 51. The Board is focused on 
the need to review and continue to develop its effectiveness, in order to support the Company in its ambitions. 

During the year, the governance processes of the Company at executive level were overhauled, with the Executive Directors meeting with the 
Senior Management team more regularly and with a specific focus on vision and strategy and the instigation of processes designed to introduce 
and foster a winning culture among our employees. The section on the Board’s Activities in 2017 demonstrates the degree to which the Board 
has engaged in these developments and provided appropriate levels of input.

Together with the reports from each of the Nomination, Remuneration and Audit Committees, this section of the Annual Report provides an 
overview of our key governance activities and practices during the last year.

As I have mentioned above, I will be stepping down as Chairman of the Board on 31 May 2018. Looking back on my time as a Non-Executive 
Director of the Company, which has spanned twelve years, I am pleased to leave a legacy of a well-managed and forward-looking Board with 
sound systems in place. I consider that the Board is well-equipped to take the Group forward for the benefit of all of its stakeholders. 

Dick Peters
Non-Executive Chairman

6 March 2018

46

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

The Board's Activities 2017

AN OVERVIEW OF SOME OF THE ACTIVITIES OF  
THE BOARD DURING 2017 IS SET OUT BELOW. 

Those with an asterisk are new initiatives of the current enlarged 
and refreshed Board and Senior Management team. There is now 
greater breadth and communication at the senior levels of the 
business and this is reflected in the pro-active approach of the 
business to change. During the year, specific activities of the 
Board included the following:

BOARD AND SENIOR MANAGEMENT STRUCTURE
•  Approving the promotion of Tony Judge to Chief Operating Officer 
and the appointment of Chris Payne as the new Chief Financial 
Officer

•  Overseeing the induction process for new Board directors
•  Overseeing the development of the Senior Management team 

with the appointments of Catherine Miles, Director of 
Communications, Sue LaVerne as People Director and Sarah Ward 
as Company Secretary 

•  Reviewing succession plans for all Directors and members of senior 

management

•  Discussions on the relevant skills required on the Board and 
progression of the search for a new Non-Executive Director 
culminating with the successful appointment of Amanda Aldridge*

STRATEGY AND MANAGEMENT
•  Requesting that the Executive Directors and Senior Management 
team undertake a wide strategic review of the business which has 
led to: the creation of a group vision; the start of a five-year 
strategic plan to include profit improvement, market consolidation 
and entry into parallel markets in order to expand the customer 
offer; and the development of 5 strategic pillars around growth, 
customers, dynamic model, margin improvement and culture  
and ethos

•  Supporting the implementation of the five-year plan 

INTERNAL CONTROLS AND RISK MANAGEMENT
•  Undertaking a review of the Group’s internal control and risk 

management systems and seeing progress in the establishment of 
a new Executive Risk Committee

•  Support for an enhanced health and safety capability and focus*
•  Support of the assessment of core IT and technology risks*
•  Assessment of capital investment in property and acquisitions
•  Receiving and considering reports on compliance with financial, 

regulatory, corporate responsibility and environmental 
commitments

GOVERNANCE AND STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT
•  Ongoing interaction with shareholders and the wider investment 

community 

•  Appointment of a dedicated Director of Communications to 

facilitate the interface with shareholders*

OPERATIONS AND MATERIAL TRANSACTIONS
•  Review and approval of the Group’s growth strategy and plans
•  Approval of the acquisition of Mitchell Carpets Limited in  

February 2017*

•  Approval of the acquisition of McMillan Flooring Limited in  

April 2017*

•  Approval of the acquisition of Domus Group of Companies Limited 

in December 2017*

•  Review of a pipeline of strategic acquisitions and growth of the 

Group’s distribution network

•  Programme of visits around the Group’s operations and projects in 

the UK and continental Europe

FINANCIAL AND PERFORMANCE REPORTING
•  Approval of the Group’s annual and half-year results
•  Review of the Group’s ongoing capital management strategy 
•  Review and approval of the dividend policy and approval of the 

interim and final proposed dividend 

•  Reviews of the Group’s performance against KPI’s 
•  Reviews of the Group’s operating and project performance
•  Approval of the Group’s 2018 budget 

47

 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Corporate Governance Report

Our governance framework helps the Company in the delivery of its strategic priorities and ensures that its obligations to its shareholders and 
others are understood and met. The Non-Executive Directors are tasked with challenging the decisions of the Executive Directors and their mix 
of skills and backgrounds allow a range of deliberations to take place.

COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
This corporate governance statement, together with the Nomination Committee report on pages 52 to 53, the Audit Committee report on 
pages 54 to 59 and the Directors Remuneration Report on pages 60 to 73, provides a description of how the main principles of the 2016 edition 
of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’) have been applied within the Company during 2017. The Code is published by the Financial 
Reporting Council and is available on its website at www.frc.org.uk.

It is the Board’s view that, throughout the financial year ended 31 December 2017, the Company complied with the relevant provisions set out in 
the Code.

This statement complies with Rule 7 of the Disclosure Rules and Transparency Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority with the information 
required to be disclosed by sub-section 2.6 of Rule 7 being shown on pages 74 to 77. 

The Board is the Company’s principal decision making body. The schedule of matters reserved for the Board, which was last reviewed on 6 April 
2016, is available on the Governance section of our website, www.headlam.com. It includes matters relating to strategy, capital expenditure, 
acquisitions and risk management. An overview of the main duties, roles and responsibilities of the constituent members of the Board are set 
out below.

CHANGES TO THE BOARD
Amanda Aldridge was appointed to the Board as a Non-Executive Director on 1 February 2018. In accordance with the Articles of Association, 
Amanda will retire from the Board at the first AGM following her appointment and stand for election. The Directors consider her appointment as 
a Director of the Company to be in the best interests of the Company and recommend shareholders to vote in favour of the resolution, as they 
intend to do in respect of their own shareholdings. Chris Payne was appointed Chief Financial Officer on 13 September 2017. In accordance with 
the Articles of Association, Chris will retire from the Board at the first AGM following his appointment and stand for election. The Directors 
consider his appointment as a Director of the Company to be in the best interests of the Company and recommend shareholders to vote in 
favour of the resolution, as they intend to do in respect of their own shareholdings. 

The Directors consider that following the appointment of Amanda Aldridge as an additional Non-Executive Director, the size of the Board 
continues to be appropriate for the Company’s size and listing. However, for the purposes of orderly succession and for expansion of the Board in 
line with the Company’s growth aspirations, the Board will continue to look to recruit a further Non-Executive Director early in 2018.

ROLES, RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES WITHIN THE BOARD – AT A GLANCE SUMMARY

The Board as a whole
•  Collectively accountable for running the Group’s affairs
•  Responsible for promoting the success of the business of the Group
•  Reviews key activities of the business on a monthly basis and at additional meetings when required
•  Responsible for setting the strategy

Chairman
•  Primary responsibility for leading the Board and ensuring its effectiveness
•  Ensures other Directors make an effective contribution and, through the Company Secretary, that the Directors receive accurate 

and timely information
•  Chairs Board meetings
•  Role and responsibilities are clearly divided from those of the Chief Executive

Non-Executive Directors
•  Particular responsibility for discussing and critically examining proposed strategies
•  The Senior Independent Director’s role includes being a ‘sounding board’ for and intermediary to the Chairman, leading the assessment of 

the Chairman’s performance and being available to shareholders

•  The role of other Non-Executive Directors includes challenge and contribution to Group strategy, periodically meeting with the Chairman 
without the Executive Directors present, participation in committees, questioning the delivery of strategic objectives and monitoring 
operational and financial performance

Executive Directors
•  Responsible for implementing the strategy
•  Organic growth and M & A – identifying opportunities and pursuing them to successful completion
•  Have regard to employee interests, fostering of business relationships and impact of operations on the community and environment
•  Approval of the annual operating plan and capital expenditure budget

48

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Chief Executive
•  The Chief Executive is responsible for leading the strategy and running the businesses in accordance with the policies and plans approved by 
the Board, leading the executive team, setting the culture and tone from the top for the Group and for communications with stakeholders 
and shareholders

•  Matters that are not specifically reserved for the Board and its Committees under their terms of reference or for shareholders in general 

meetings are delegated to the Chief Executive

As at 31 December 2017 the Board comprised:

Non-Executive Chairman

Executive Directors

Independent Non-Executive Directors

Dick Peters

Steve Wilson, Chief Executive

Andrew Eastgate, Senior Independent Director

Chris Payne, Chief Financial Officer

Philip Lawrence

Tony Judge, Chief Operating Officer

Amanda Aldridge*

*  On 1 February 2018 Amanda Aldridge was appointed as a Non-Executive Director of the Board.

Directors’ attendance during the year at Board meetings is set out on page 50 with all Directors attending all meetings to which they were invited, 
and attendance at meetings of the Audit, Nomination and Remuneration Committees is given in the relevant Committee report.

The Board considers that it may be beneficial for the Executive Directors to hold an external directorship to broaden their experience and 
normally this would be limited to one company. With effect from 31 January 2014, Steve Wilson was appointed a Non-Executive Director of 
Conviviality Plc. It is not considered that there is any conflict of interest or imbalance of duties by virtue of Steve Wilson holding this appointment.

The Board considers the balance achieved between Executive and Non-Executive Directors, following the recruitment of Chris Payne as Chief 
Financial Officer and Amanda Aldridge as Non-Executive Director as appropriate and effective for the control and direction of the business. 

The Directors bring strong judgement to the Board’s deliberations and the size and balance of skills and experience of the Board are considered 
appropriate for the requirements of the business and the size of the Company. The Board has considered the independence of the Non-
Executive Directors and consider that all three (excluding the Chairman) are independent of management and free from any business or other 
relationship that could materially interfere with the exercise of independent and objective judgement. In making this determination the Board 
has considered whether each Director is independent in character and judgement and whether there are relationships or circumstances which 
are likely to, or could, affect the Director’s judgement. 

Andrew Eastgate, who served as the Senior Independent Director throughout the year, is available to shareholders if they have concerns which 
are not resolved through the normal channels of the Chairman, Chief Executive or Chief Financial Officer, or for which such contact is 
inappropriate. The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors do not participate in any bonus, share option or pension scheme of the Group. They 
are initially appointed for a three-year term and, subject to review and re-election, can serve up to a maximum of three such terms.

ELECTION AND RE-ELECTION OF DIRECTORS 
All Directors are subject to election by shareholders at the first AGM following their appointment by the Board. Under the Articles of Association 
of the Company, each of the Directors is required to retire by rotation at least once every three years. Chris Payne and Amanda Aldridge are 
seeking election and Steve Wilson and Philip Lawrence are seeking re-election at the forthcoming AGM. 

The Board is of the opinion, supported by the Nomination Committee, that each Director continues to make an effective and valuable 
contribution and demonstrates commitment to their role.

49

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Corporate Governance Report continued

BOARD MEETINGS AND ATTENDANCE
The Board met nine times in the year, at times that ensure the latest operating information is available for review or when key strategic decisions 
need to be made and when sufficient focus can be given to matters under consideration. During the year there is ample opportunity for the 
Chairman to meet with the Non-Executive Directors without the Executive Directors being present, should this be deemed appropriate. In 
addition, Non-Executive Directors have substantial contact between meetings and endeavour to visit trading locations in order to maintain 
contact with the Group’s wider employee base and review operations first-hand. A record of Directors’ attendance at Board meetings held 
during the year is set out below and Committee meeting attendance is given in the relevant Committee report.

Steve Wilson  
Tony Judge 
Chris Payne 
Dick Peters  
Andrew Eastgate 
Philip Lawrence 

9/9
7/7*
4/4*
9/9
9/9
9/9

* Appointed to the Board part-way through the year, attended all eligible meetings. Amanda Aldridge was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 1 February 2018 

DIRECTORS’ CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
Procedures are maintained by the Board whereby potential conflicts of interests are reviewed regularly. These procedures have been designed 
so that the Board may be reasonably assured that any potential situation where a Director may have a direct or indirect interest which may 
conflict, or may possibly conflict, with the interests of the Group are identified and, where appropriate, dealt with in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s Articles of Association. The Board has not had to deal with any conflict during the period.

Directors holding significant commitments outside of the Company are required to disclose them prior to appointment and on an ongoing basis 
where there are any changes. Actual and potential conflicts of interest are regularly reviewed. Under the Articles of Association, the Board has 
authority to authorise potential conflicts of interest and to impose any limits or conditions it sees fit. All of the Directors are required to allocate 
sufficient time to the Group to discharge their responsibilities effectively. As part of the annual evaluation process, this is reviewed by 
the Chairman.

information on Board meeting procedures;

INDUCTION AND TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
When joining the Board, induction programmes are tailored for each individual Director. A comprehensive information pack is compiled 
which includes:
•  background information about the Company;
•  briefings on Directors’ duties and responsibilities;
• 
•  Board minutes;
• 
internal policies;
•  structure charts;
•  matters reserved for the Board;
• 
•  shareholder and other stakeholder feedback; and 
•  Committee terms of reference. 

financial budgets;

The information pack also includes an explanation of the Group’s financing structure and relevant statutory and regulatory guidance notes, 
including the Code and the Company’s share dealing policy. 

An induction programme will include briefings on general strategy and other matters, site visits, and one-to-one meetings with all relevant 
colleagues, including other Directors and members of the Senior Management team as well as with advisers including the Company’s 
Stockbrokers and Auditor. 

Training and development in the year took various forms, including visits to Group businesses and attendance at courses run by professional 
bodies on various commercial and regulatory matters. Directors receive regular updates appropriate to the business throughout the year aimed 
at developing and refreshing their knowledge and capabilities. All Directors are considered to be suitably qualified, trained and experienced so as 
to be able to participate fully in the work of the Board. To assist with the independent conduct of their function and, if required, in connection with 
their duties, a process is in place for the Non-Executive Directors to obtain professional advice at the Company’s expense.

The Non-Executive Directors are encouraged to further their knowledge of the Company by spending time with the Executive Directors, the 
members of the Senior Management team and other senior managers on site visits. Non-Executive Directors are also encouraged to engage 
with people across the business to further enhance their understanding of the business.

50

 
 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 2017
The Code recommends that an evaluation of the effectiveness of the Board and its Committees is conducted annually and that this process is 
externally facilitated at least every third year. 

In 2017, an evaluation of the Board’s effectiveness, including the effectiveness of the Board Committees, was undertaken internally. In 2018, an 
evaluation will be undertaken externally given the change process that the Board is currently within.

The 2017 evaluation concluded that the Board and its Committees continued to operate effectively, meeting the requirements and spirit of the 
Code. Since the evaluation, the Board has improved its functions and processes, including through:
•  Provision of more comprehensive Board papers, additionally provided on an earlier basis;
•  More in-depth financial evaluation of proposed capital expenditure projects and investments; and
• 

Introducing a greater breadth of skills and expertise to call upon for advice through appointments at the Board, Senior Management team and 
senior managerial level.

BOARD COMMITTEES
The Board has established Audit, Nomination and Remuneration Committees to oversee and debate important issues of policy and assist in 
attending to its responsibilities, with terms of reference that each comply with the provisions of the Code and are available in the Governance 
section of the Company’s website. 

NOMINATION COMMITTEE
Information on the activities of the Nomination Committee is given in the Nomination Committee Report on pages 52 to 53 which should be 
read in conjunction with this report.

AUDIT COMMITTEE
Information on the activities of the Audit Committee is given in the Audit Committee Report on pages 54 to 59 which should be read in 
conjunction with this report.

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
The Directors Remuneration Report is set out on pages 60 to73. The report also includes the Annual Report on Remuneration which is subject to 
an advisory vote at the 2018 AGM.

THE ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
All shareholders have the opportunity to communicate directly with the Board at the AGM. Shareholders are able to ask questions during the 
meeting, followed by an opportunity to meet with the Directors of the business on an informal basis. The Senior Management team will also 
attend the AGM and meet with shareholders before and after the meeting. All of the Directors attend and the Chairman of the Board and each 
Committee are available to answer shareholder questions during the formal business of the meeting. The voting on all resolutions at the AGM is 
conducted on a show of hands unless a poll is requested and in accordance with the Code a separate resolution on each substantially separate 
issue will be proposed. The Company will release the results of voting, including proxy votes on each resolution, on its website on the next 
business day at www.headlam.com/investors and announce them through a regulatory news service. Details of the 2018 AGM are set out in the 
circular to shareholders sent separately to this document and incorporating a Notice of Annual General Meeting.

51

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Nomination Committee Report

I am pleased to present the Nomination Committee Report for 2017 which has seen both new Board appointments and appointments to the 
Senior Management team as follows:

•  Catherine Miles as Director of Communications in January 2017
•  Tony Judge as Chief Operating Officer in March 2017
•  Chris Payne as Chief Financial Officer in September 2017
•  Sarah Ward as Company Secretary in September 2017 
•  Sue LaVerne as People Director in October 2017
•  Amanda Aldridge as Non-Executive Director (appointed in February 2018)

MEMBERSHIP AND ATTENDANCE AT MEETINGS HELD IN 2017
The Nomination Committee meets when required and met three times in the year, the table below identifying members in attendance. 

Members

Dick Peters
Philip Lawrence
Andrew Eastgate 
Steve Wilson 

Meetings attended

Eligible to attend

3
3
3
3

3
3
3
3

*Dick Peters will be resigning from the Nomination Committee on 31 May 2018. Amanda Aldridge was appointed on 1 February 2018.

Only members of the Nomination Committee are entitled to be present at meetings but other Directors and advisers may be invited by the 
Nomination Committee to attend. The Board has agreed the procedures to be followed by the Nomination Committee in making appointments 
to the various positions on the Board and to the Senior Management team.

PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND SUCCESSION
Ahead of 2017’s internal evaluation process, the Committee met to consider the most effective method for the review of the Board, its 
Committees and the individual contribution of each Director.

The Nomination Committee, in conjunction with the Board, receives updates from the Chief Executive on succession and development planning 
for senior positions within the Group. 

2017 AND 2018 FOCUS
Board succession planning continued to be a key focus for the Nomination Committee in 2017. In 2018 the Nomination Committee will continue 
to pursue the recruitment of a further Non-Executive Director.

RE-ELECTION AND EVALUATION 
As part of its role, the Nomination Committee considered the time required from each Non-Executive Director, their effectiveness and the 
experience brought to the Board. New Directors are appointed by the Board and, in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association,  
they must be elected at the next AGM to continue in office. Existing Directors retire by rotation in accordance with article 89 of the Articles of 
Association, which requires them to retire from office and, if eligible for reappointment, stand again at the third AGM after which they were 
appointed or last reappointed.

Items discussed by the Nomination Committee during the year to enable it to discharge its duties in accordance with its terms of reference 
included proposals to re-elect Steve Wilson and Philip Lawrence under the retirement by rotation provisions and Philip Lawrence’s appointment 
as Chairman on 1 June 2018 in succession to Dick Peters.

Having regard to the personal effectiveness and commitment assessed as part of the evaluation of the Board, through the completion of an 
internally prepared questionnaire, the performance of each continuing Board member was considered to be effective and therefore 
shareholders are recommended to vote in favour of resolutions 3, 4, 5 and 6 at the 2018 AGM (which are the resolutions relating to Chris Payne, 
Amanda Aldridge, Steve Wilson and Philip Lawrence).

TERMS OF REFERENCE
Full terms of reference of the Nomination Committee can be found in the governance section of the Company’s website. In accordance with its 
terms of reference, the Nomination Committee has also considered its own effectiveness during the year. This allows the Nomination 
Committee to formally review the way it works and whether its strategy for discharging its duties remains appropriate. The Nomination 
Committee is satisfied that it continues to perform its duties in accordance with its terms of reference.

BOARD DIVERSITY POLICY
The approach to Board diversity is unchanged. The Company continues to take note of the guidance provided and to make appointments on the 
basis of merit. However, it recognises the benefit that greater diversity can bring and takes into account such factors when considering any 
particular appointment. The Company has now appointed the first female director to the Board. 

52

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

ADVICE
The Nomination Committee has access to such information and advice, both from within the Company and externally, at the cost of the 
Company, as it deems necessary. This may include the appointment of external executive search consultants, where appropriate. No Director  
is involved in any decisions regarding their own reappointment or re-election. The Company engaged PGC as a consultant in the recruitment  
of Chris Payne and Ridgeway Partners as a consultant in the recruitment of Amanda Aldridge. Neither PGC nor Ridgeway Partners is or has been 
connected in any other way with the Company.

Changes to Directors’ commitments are reported to the Nomination Committee as they arise and are considered on their individual merits. 
Appointments to the Nomination Committee are made by the Board.

Andrew Eastgate
Chairman of the Nomination Committee

6 March 2018

53

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Audit Committee Report

As Chairman of the Audit Committee I am pleased to present the Audit Committee’s Report for the year ended 31 December 2017. The Audit 
Committee has undertaken its work knowing that the Group has operated without a Chief Financial Officer until September 2017 but has taken 
assurance from knowing that there is an underlying risk management and control process, driven by detailed financial oversight from the head 
office and close operational knowledge from the Chief Executive and Chief Operations Officer. The additional capabilities within the new Senior 
Management team have enhanced the assessment and management of risk that would otherwise threaten the business model, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity of the Group.

The Audit Committee is composed wholly of the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors. Each of the Audit Committee members contributes 
their considerable business and financial experience to the reports, statements and matters considered, challenged and debated by the Audit 
Committee to effectively assess the external audit of the Group and the internal control and risk management systems in place. The Board 
considers that Dick Peters, Amanda Aldridge and I meet the requirements of the UK Corporate Governance Code (‘Code’) as having recent and 
relevant financial experience. 

The Audit Committee (as well as the Board as a whole) continues to monitor changes in the Group’s key risks and welcomes the five pillar 
strategy that will help the Group to mitigate the risks presented from market demand, competitors, technology and people. The mitigation of 
risk within regulation, particularly relating to operational health and safety matters has been enhanced during the year. To ensure that it remains 
appropriate and provides a robust assessment of the principal risks, the Audit Committee has reviewed the risk management framework and the 
assurance process.

The robust assessment is supported by the Group’s accounting team which undertakes reviews of each business, similar to those that might be 
undertaken by a formal internal audit function. The Audit Committee has reviewed the proposed internal controls and the detailed audit plan for 
the next 12 months, both of which will assist the Group in achieving its strategic objectives by improving the effectiveness of risk management, 
control and governance processes.

PricewaterhouseCoopers (‘PwC’) were appointed as auditors in 2016 following a full tender exercise. The Audit Committee believes that PwC 
have to date provided an effective audit service in line with their proposal and commitments at the time of the audit tender and recommends 
their reappointment to shareholders at the forthcoming AGM. 

The Audit Committee Report describes the work of the Audit Committee, its responsibilities and key tasks, as well as its major areas of activity 
and key considerations for the financial year.

From 1 June 2018 it is intended that Amanda Aldridge will be appointed as Chair of the Audit Committee when I take on the role of  
Chairman of the Board.

Philip Lawrence
Chairman of the Audit Committee

6 March 2018

54

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

AUDIT COMMITTEE
The Audit Committee has an agenda linked to events in the Company’s financial calendar, normally meeting at least twice a year before the final 
and interim results announcements. The Audit Committee met three times in the year and attendance was as follows:

Members

Philip Lawrence
Dick Peters 
Andrew Eastgate 

Meetings attended

Eligible to attend

3
3
3

3
3
3

*Dick Peters will step down from the Audit Committee on 31 May 2018. Amanda Aldridge was appointed on 1 February 2018. 

During the year the Audit Committee discharged its responsibilities as set out in the terms of reference and schedule of business for the year. 
Whilst only members of the Audit Committee are entitled to be present at meetings, the Auditor, Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer may 
attend by invitation. The Audit Committee has authority to investigate any matters within its terms of reference, access resources, call for 
information and obtain external professional advice at the cost of the Company. The full terms of reference of the Audit Committee, which were 
reviewed during 2017, can be found in the governance section of the Company’s website, www.headlam.com.

ROLE OF THE AUDIT COMMITTEE
The Audit Committee is responsible for monitoring and reviewing:
•  the effectiveness of the Group’s systems of internal control and risk management and control over financial reporting;
•  updates from Executive Directors and members of the Senior Management team on key financial control matters;
•  the consistency of and any changes to the Group’s accounting policies and the application of appropriate accounting standards and  

methods used to account for significant or unusual transactions;

•  the appointment, reappointment or dismissal of the Auditor
•  the integrity of the interim and annual financial statements, including a review of the significant financial reporting judgements  

contained therein;

•  the effectiveness of the audit process;
•  the Auditor’s plan for the audit of the Group’s accounts, confirmation of the Auditor’s objectivity and independence and of the individuals 
carrying out the audit, approval of the proposed audit fee, approving the audit terms of engagement, the Company’s relationship with the 
Auditor and management’s response to any major audit recommendations;

•  reports from management and the Auditor on the Group’s systems of internal control, including a summary of and commentary on the 

business risks and internal control processes, and reporting to the Board on the results of this review;

•  the application of the Board’s policy on non-audit work performed by the Auditor together with the non-audit fees payable to the Auditor;
•  the appropriateness of an internal audit function; 
•  the Group’s overall approach to securing compliance with laws, regulations and governance; and
•  the Group’s systems for detecting fraud, preventing bribery and allowing employees to raise concerns in a safe and confidential manner.

KEY ACTIVITIES OF THE AUDIT COMMITTEE DURING THE YEAR
In addition to matters relating specifically to its terms of reference, agendas incorporate matters arising and topical items on which the Audit 
Committee has chosen to focus.

The work of the Audit Committee during the year is summarised in the table below.

Internal controls and risk

Auditor

Financial Reporting

Considered reports from management and 
the Auditor on their assessment of the control 
environment.

Considered and approved the audit approach 
and scope of the audit work to be undertaken 
by the Auditor and their fees.

Reviewed the half year and annual financial 
statements and the significant financial 
reporting judgements.

Assessed the effectiveness of the Group’s 
internal control environment and the need for 
an internal audit function.

Reviewed reports on audit findings.

Reviewed the main corporate risks and the 
outcomes from testing the systems and 
processes for managing and mitigating those 
risks, satisfying itself that the risk 
management framework provides sufficient 
assurances.

Considered the independence of the Auditor 
and their effectiveness.

Considered the liquidity risk and the basis for 
preparing the Group’s half yearly and full year 
accounts on a going concern basis and 
reviewed the related disclosures in the annual 
report and accounts.

Reviewed a viability statement that assesses 
the prospects of the Group over a three-year 
period. The Audit Committee considered that 
the Group’s existing three-year financial 
planning view makes that time period the 
most appropriate.

Reviewed reporting disclosures in relation to 
internal controls, risk management, principal 
risks and uncertainties and the work of the 
Audit Committee.

55

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Audit Committee Report continued

Internal controls and risk

Auditor

Financial Reporting

Reviewed matters reported in accordance 
with the whistleblowing policy which allows 
employees to raise concerns in a safe and 
confidential manner.

Reviewed and considered whether the annual 
report and accounts is balanced, fair and 
understandable, and provides information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the 
Group’s performance, business model 
and strategy. 

The Audit Committee has also considered during the year the impact of changes to accounting standards which are to be introduced and in 
particular IRFS 15 the new revenue recognition standard and IRFS 9 the new accounting standard which introduces a new classification approach 
for financial assets and liabilities, given that the comparative periods for these accounting standards commence from 1 January 2017. In 
addition, the Audit Committee has considered the timetable for adoption of IFRS 16 which sets out the principles for the recognition, 
measurement, presentation and disclosure of leases for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019.

KEY ISSUES CONSIDERED BY THE AUDIT COMMITTEE
After discussion with both management and the Auditor, the Audit Committee determined that the key risks of misstatement of the Group’s 
financial statements, related to:
•  acquisition accounting;
•  supplier arrangements; 
• 
inventory valuation; and
•  valuation of employee benefit liabilities.
These issues were discussed with management during the year and with the Auditor at the time the Audit Committee reviewed and agreed the 
Auditor’s Group audit plan and presented its findings at the conclusion of its year end audit.

ACQUISITION ACCOUNTING
The Group made a significant acquisition toward the end of 2017, which has resulted in the creation of goodwill, intangible assets and a judgment 
over the useful economic life of each category of intangible asset. The Audit Committee reviewed management’s calculation of the 
consideration and the intangible assets, challenged the assumptions used in arriving at each category of asset and assessed the useful 
economic lives over which to amortise the assets. The Audit Committee is satisfied the values reflected for goodwill and intangible assets  
are based on appropriately robust assumptions and that the amortisation charge appropriately reflects the useful economic lives of the 
intangible assets.

SUPPLIER ARRANGEMENTS
The Group has a significant number of rebate agreements with suppliers. These agreements can contain multiple terms or tiered arrangements 
based on the volume of goods purchased and significant amounts remain outstanding at the year end. 

The Audit Committee reviewed management’s calculation of amounts expected to be received. Management explained the process of 
recalculating the amounts expected to be received and confirming these balances with suppliers. The Audit Committee challenged the 
assumptions used by management and reviewed the level of cash receipts or credit notes received after the year end. The Audit Committee is 
satisfied that the amounts recognised have been appropriately scrutinised and that the assumptions upon which the calculation was based are 
sufficiently robust. 

INVENTORY VALUATION
As set out in the statement of financial position, inventory amounts to £131.5 million and represents the Group’s second largest asset class. 
Inventory is held across a broad and diverse product range which is subject to a risk that changes in consumer tastes and demand may result in 
some inventory lines becoming slow-moving or obsolete, such that the recoverable amount is less than the carrying value.

The Audit Committee discussed the Group’s management of its inventory position and calculation of net cost and gave careful consideration to 
the gross carrying value and related provisions. Management explained to the Audit Committee that the process of determining the appropriate 
valuation of inventory entailed close monitoring of inventory levels, review of relevant supplier rebates or overheads which should be absorbed 
into the cost of inventory, review of the ageing profile and consideration of inventory sold for less than its carrying value. These three measures 
are reported to senior management on a monthly basis by individual businesses. Management use this information to determine the provisions 
to be made against inventory.

The Audit Committee reviewed the valuation basis and challenged management’s assumptions. The Audit Committee was satisfied that the 
significant assumptions used for determining the valuation of inventory had been appropriately scrutinised and challenged and were sufficiently robust.

VALUATION OF EMPLOYEE BENEFIT LIABILITIES
In the UK, the Company operates a defined benefit pension scheme (the ‘Scheme’), further details of which are set out in note 20 to the financial 
statements. At 31 December 2017, the Scheme had assets of £116 million and liabilities, measured on an IAS 19 basis, of £126.3 million, with a net deficit 
of £9.7 million.

As set out in note 20 to the financial statements, the Scheme liabilities are calculated by estimating the amount of benefit that employees have earned 
for their service in current and future periods. This estimation requires making certain assumptions, notably in relation to inflation rates, mortality rates 
and the discount rate to apply to determine present value. The selection of these assumptions is subjective and small changes in these assumptions 
can materially impact the net IAS 19 deficit reported in the statement of financial position. Further, the liabilities for the Scheme were measured using 
both IAS 19 and the Trustees provisional Technical Provisions basis for the 31 March 2017 actuarial valuation date (as opposed to 31 December 2017). 
The assumptions adopted by management are set out in note 20 to the financial statements.

56

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

In selecting the assumptions, management took advice from the Group’s external actuary and considered the appropriateness of this advice in light of 
the specific circumstances of the Scheme. Management highlighted to the Audit Committee how they arrived at the key assumptions.

The Audit Committee reviewed management’s assumptions and were satisfied that they had been appropriately scrutinised and challenged and were 
robust. They also reviewed the sensitivity analysis set out in note 20 to the financial statements and consider it to be appropriate.

The Audit Committee considered the views and procedures of the Auditor, which entailed a benchmarking of management’s assumptions with the 
Auditor’s expectations.

MISSTATEMENTS
Management reported to the Audit Committee that they were not aware of any material misstatements or immaterial misstatements made 
intentionally to achieve a particular presentation. The Auditor reported to the Audit Committee the misstatements that they had found in the 
course of their work and no material amounts remain unadjusted. The Audit Committee confirmed that it was satisfied that the Auditor had 
fulfilled their responsibilities with diligence and professional scepticism. 

After reviewing the presentations and reports from management and consulting, where necessary, with the Auditor, the Audit Committee was 
satisfied that the financial statements appropriately addressed the critical judgements and key estimates, both in respect to the amounts 
reported and the disclosures. The Audit Committee was also satisfied that the significant assumptions used for determining the value of assets 
and liabilities had been appropriately scrutinised and challenged and were sufficiently robust.

RISK MANAGEMENT AND INTERNAL CONTROL
The Group’s risk management processes seek to ensure sustainable development through the conduct of its business in a way which:

•  meets the needs of its customers;
•  maintains proper relationships with suppliers and contractors;
•  provides a safe and healthy workplace;
•  minimises the cost and consumption of increasingly scarce resources; and
•  maintains a positive relationship with the communities in which it operates.

The systems are designed to meet the Group’s particular needs and to manage rather than eliminate risks, by their nature, providing reasonable 
and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss. The measures taken, including physical controls, segregation of duties and 
reviews by management, are considered by the Board to provide sufficient and objective assurance.

The Board maintained its process of hierarchical reporting and review during the year in order to evaluate the effectiveness of the Group’s 
systems of financial and non-financial controls. A comprehensive series of operating and financial control procedures applying to all businesses 
has been developed and the Group finance team performs monthly reviews to verify that the businesses are complying with the prescribed 
operating and financial control procedures. Additionally, the Board reviews risk management arrangements and the Audit Committee receives 
reports from the Auditor on matters identified in the course of its statutory audit work. These procedures provide a documented and auditable 
trail of accountability, the results of which are periodically reviewed for completeness and accuracy. 

These procedures also allow for assurances to be provided at each level of management up to the Board. Planned corrective actions are 
monitored for timely completion. The Board has not identified any failings or weaknesses, or been advised of any failings or weaknesses, which in 
any case it has determined to be significant during the course of its review of the system of internal control. There were in addition no changes in 
the Group’s internal controls or financial reporting that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to adversely affect, the Group’s systems 
of internal control.

A comprehensive planning system includes detailed reviews at all business and formal reviews and approval of annual plans by the Board. Actual 
performance is measured on a monthly basis against plan and prior year, including a detailed explanation of significant variances. Revenue, gross 
margin and cash flow are reported on a daily basis against plan and prior year. The control procedures operated by the Group are designed to 
ensure complete and accurate accounting for financial transactions and to limit the potential exposure to fraud. Guidelines for capital 
expenditure and investment appraisal include annual plans, detailed appraisal and review procedures, authority levels and due diligence 
requirements when businesses are acquired and the acquisition or disposal of a business requiring formal Board approval. These detailed reviews 
are an important aspect of management reporting in the identification of new and emerging risks.

An ongoing process of risk management and internal control in accordance with the Code has been in place for the financial year under review 
and up to the date of this report, the careful management of risk is considered to be a key activity in delivering business opportunities.
The ethos of the Group, delegation of responsibility and other control procedures together with accounting policies and procedures are 
communicated through the Group and employee handbook, supported by the Group’s anti-bribery policy. The integrity and competence of 
personnel is assessed during the recruitment process and monitored throughout employment.

An Executive Risk Committee (comprising the Chief Financial Officer, People Director, Company Secretary, National Health and Safety Manager, and 
Logistics and Compliance Director) serves as a governance body to provide oversight, review and challenge of the risk management processes, and to 
confirm that appropriate and proportionate risk management procedures are in place. Investigations are carried out in respect of any accidents or 
matters warranting further detail. The work of the Executive Risk Committee will be reviewed by the Audit Committee going forward.

The Group promotes a high standard of health and safety management at all levels supported by training programmes at operating businesses.
The Group’s approach to Health & Safety is detailed on pages 36 to 37 of the Strategic Report.

57

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Audit Committee Report continued

INTERNAL AUDIT
In accordance with the Code, the Audit Committee has undertaken an assessment of the need for a Group internal audit function. The Audit 
Committee considers that the Group’s accounting team, control systems and associated procedures are adequate for the business and 
therefore does not currently propose to introduce a formal Group internal audit function. The Audit Committee will continue to review the need 
on an annual basis.

EXTERNAL AUDIT
The Audit Committee reviews annually the appointment and performance of the Auditor and considers their independence and objectivity 
taking into account all appropriate guidelines. Following a review of PwC’s performance and independence in 2017, including compliance with 
rules on non-audit services, the Audit Committee was satisfied with the Auditor’s effectiveness and independence.

The Audit Committee assessed the ongoing effectiveness of the Auditor and audit process on the basis of meetings with Executive Directors.  
In reviewing the independence of the Auditor, the Audit Committee considered a number of factors which included the standing, experience and 
tenure of the audit partner, the nature and level of services provided by the Auditor and confirmation from the Auditor that it had complied with 
relevant regulatory requirements.

The Audit Committee has the specific task of keeping the nature and extent of non-audit services provided by the Auditor under review in order 
to ensure that objectivity and independence are maintained. The Auditor has processes in place to ensure independence is maintained when 
providing non-audit services and has written to the Audit Committee confirming that, in its opinion, they remain independent within the meaning 
of the regulation on this matter and their professional standards.

In addition, the fees and objectivity of the Auditor were considered by the Audit Committee. The Audit Committee recognises that there are 
occasions when it is advantageous to use the Auditor to undertake non-audit services, where they are best placed to do so. Non-audit fees paid 
to the Auditor should not exceed 70% of the audit fee. The Chairman of the Audit Committee is required to authorise non-audit work above a 
pre-agreed threshold. A breakdown of audit and non-audit fees is provided in note 3 to the financial statements. Non-audit fees of £91,000 were 
incurred in respect of financial due diligence services in relation to the acquisition by the Company of the entire issued share capital of  
The Domus Group of Companies Limited.

The Audit Committee has independent access to the Auditor and the Auditor has direct access to the Chairman of the Audit Committee outside 
formal Audit Committee meetings. At each meeting there is an opportunity for the Auditor to discuss matters with the Audit Committee, 
without executive management being present.

FAIR, BALANCED AND UNDERSTANDABLE ASSESSMENT
In accordance with the Code’s requirement that the Board should consider whether the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, 
balanced and understandable, reviews are undertaken by the finance team as part of the year end process. The Board receives drafts of the 
Annual Report and Accounts to allow sufficient time to review and provide an opportunity for challenge and discussion, ahead of approving the 
final documents. In addition, the Auditor reviews the consistency between the narrative reporting and financial disclosures.

WHISTLEBLOWING POLICY
The Company has a Whistleblowing Policy, the purpose of which is to ensure that our people feel secure when raising any concerns they may 
have, without any adverse effect on their career and development.

SUMMARY
The Audit Committee has concluded as a result of its work during the year that it has acted in accordance with its terms of reference and fulfilled 
its responsibilities. The Audit Committee Chairman will be available at the AGM to answer any questions on the work of the Audit Committee.

58

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

ENGAGEMENT WITH SHAREHOLDERS
The Company places considerable importance on communication with shareholders. Ongoing engagement with shareholders and the  
wider investment community, including analysts and investors not currently holding shares in the Company, is essential to their understanding  
of the Company; their ability to appraise the performance and management of the Company; and consideration of the Company as an  
investment proposition. 

As more fully detailed on page 31 of the Strategic Report, the Company offers its larger shareholders, either directly or via its broker, face-to-
face meetings on a bi-annual basis at a minimum, to present and discuss performance and other matters, and obtain any feedback. These 
meetings are hosted by several of the Executive Directors and the Company’s Director of Communications. The Company also retains a 
Financial PR and IR adviser (Buchanan) to facilitate interaction and support its communication with shareholders and other members of the 
investment community.

Meetings are also periodically held with shareholders at various Group locations to help illustrate the Group’s operations and aid understanding. 
Non-Executive Directors, including the Chairman, attend certain events and briefings during the year in addition to the AGM where shareholders 
are present, and the Non-Executive Directors are committed to facilitating a direct channel of communication with the Group’s larger 
shareholders to hear any views and concerns.

The Company actively seeks shareholder feedback, and feedback is collated by both the Company and its advisers, discussed at Board and 
Senior Management team level and considered in relation to all aspects of the Group which helps inform its written and verbal communications.

59

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Directors Remuneration Report
THE CHAIRMAN’S ANNUAL STATEMENT

On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Directors Remuneration Report for 2017, which features this statement and the Report on 
Remuneration for the year ended 31 December 2017. At the 2017 AGM, shareholders voted in favour of the adoption of the current 
remuneration policy with over 99% of the votes in support for both adoption of the policy and the Annual Report on Remuneration. The policy 
was designed to simplify the previous remuneration structure and encourage long term focus on sustained business improvement. Also, at the 
2017 AGM, a new long-term incentive plan (the ‘PSP’ as defined below) was adopted with 97.26 % of the votes cast voting in favour of the PSP and 
additionally a deferred bonus plan (the ‘DBP’ also defined below) was adopted with 99.53 % of the votes cast voting in favour of the DBP.

As is noted elsewhere, the Company made a significant number of senior appointments during 2017, both internal and external.

I am pleased to say that our new policy has enabled and supported us in making appropriate changes to the Board in line with our succession 
plans. It has provided the Remuneration Committee with a simple framework focused on sustained business improvement. Key features are:

•  Maximum bonus opportunity of 125% of base salary.
•  The introduction of deferral into the annual bonus so that one-third of any amount earned is deferred into shares for two years. 
•  This deferral element is delivered under the terms of the Deferred Bonus Plan (‘DBP’).
•  A new Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) with a maximum opportunity of 100% of salary, although awards in 2017 and 2018 have been set at 

80% of salary. The PSP includes a two-year holding requirement after the awards vest.

•  A maximum pension contribution (or cash allowance in lieu of pension) of up to 15% of salary for future hires.
•  Clarity on our shareholding guidelines, which require that Executive Directors build up and maintain a shareholding in the Company equivalent 

in value to 200% of annual salary .

BUSINESS PERFORMANCE AND INCENTIVE OUT-TURN FOR 2017
The Company continued to grow in 2017 despite softer market conditions compared with 2016, showing a 2.0% growth in revenue and 
improvement in margins which resulted in reported 2017 underlying profit before tax of £43.1 million, an improvement of 7.5% on 2016. Bonus 
earned, based on this underlying profit before tax, was 65.82% of the maximum. Two thirds of this will be paid in cash and one third deferred into 
shares which must be held for a further two years from the date on which the annual bonus payout is determined.

DIRECTOR CHANGES
As explained in the Directors Remuneration Report last year, Tony Judge was appointed to the Board as Chief Operating Officer on 31 March 
2017 and his salary was set at £425,000 reflecting the extension of his existing responsibilities and the scope of his new role. This rate of salary 
was payable with effect from 1 January 2017. Chris Payne joined the Board as Chief Financial Officer in September 2017 and his annual salary was 
set at £325,000 with an agreement that it would increase to £350,000 with effect from 1 March 2018, subject to performance (which will equate 
to £346,000 over the 12 months to 31 December 2018). Chris forfeited variable pay arrangements when he left his previous role and the 
Company therefore agreed to pay a bonus of £133,000. In addition, Chris was granted awards under the PSP equal to 80% of salary on joining the 
Company with the same performance conditions as for all other 2017 PSP participants. 

Philip Lawrence will become Chairman of the Board from 1 June 2018. The Board considered what was an appropriate market competitive fee  
so that the Company could secure the best candidate for the role. Accordingly fees for the Chairman were set at £143,500 to take effect  
upon appointment.

PSP AWARDS IN 2017 
Awards under the PSP were granted during 2017 to the Executive Directors (each such award equating to 80% of salary) using a share price of 
536.8 pence. Further details of the awards and the performance conditions attaching are set out on page 67.

REMUNERATION FOR 2018
Other than in respect of Chris Payne whose annual salary increased from £325,000 per annum in 2017 to £350,000 per annum in 2018 with 
effect from 1 March 2018 (because his salary was set at a lower rate for the first six months of his employment and increased thereafter), none of 
the Executive Directors will receive any increase in base salary for 2018. 

All aspects of variable pay will remain unchanged in 2018 with the same structure applying as the Remuneration Committee considers that this 
continues to be appropriate.

CONCLUSION
We believe that the combination of a holding period on the PSP, the deferral into shares under the annual bonus scheme, and the shareholding 
guidelines aligns Executive Director interests with the interests of shareholders and provides a beneficial long-term framework for our business. 

We remain committed to a responsible approach to executive pay as I trust that this Directors Remuneration Report demonstrates. As always, I 
am happy to meet or speak with shareholders if there are any questions or feedback on our approach to executive remuneration.

Andrew Eastgate
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

6 March 2018

60

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

KEY PRINCIPLES OF THE REMUNERATION POLICY
The table below sets out a summary of the policy for Executive Directors. 
Policy table for Executive Directors

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Component

Base salary

To provide a competitive 
base salary for the market in 
which the Group operates 
to attract and retain 
Executives of a suitable 
calibre.

Salaries are usually reviewed 
annually taking into account:
•  pay and conditions 

elsewhere in the Group; 

•  overall performance;
• 

individual performance 
and experience; 

•  competitive salary levels 
and market forces.

Although there are no 
formal performance 
conditions, any increase in 
base salary is only 
implemented after careful 
consideration of individual 
contribution and 
performance.

Not applicable.

While there is no maximum 
salary, increases will 
normally be in line with the 
typical range of salary 
increases awarded (in 
percentage of salary terms) 
to the wider workforce. 
Larger salary increases may 
be awarded to take account 
of individual circumstances, 
such as, but not limited to:
•  where an Executive 
Director has been 
promoted or has had a 
change in scope or 
responsibility;
•  an individual’s 

development or 
performance in role (e.g. 
to align a newly 
appointed Executive 
Director’s salary with the 
market over time);
•  where there has been a 
change in market 
practice; or

•  where there has been a 

change in the size and/or 
complexity of the 
business.
Increases may be 
implemented over such 
time period as the 
Committee deems 
appropriate.

Whilst the Remuneration 
Committee has not set an 
absolute maximum on the 
level of benefits Executive 
Directors may receive, the 
value of benefits is set at a 
level that the Remuneration 
Committee considers 
appropriate against the 
market and provides a 
sufficient level of benefits 
based on individual 
circumstances

Up to 15% of base salary.

Not applicable.

Not applicable.

SAYE contributions and the 
level of discount are as 
permitted in accordance 
with the relevant tax 
legislation from time to 
time. 

61

Benefits

To provide broadly market 
competitive benefits as part 
of the total remuneration 
package.

Retirement benefits New appointments may be 

entitled to an appropriate 
level of retirement benefit 
(or cash allowance 
equivalent).

Save as You Earn
Scheme (‘SAYE’)

Participation in the Save as 
You Earn share option 
scheme (‘SAYE’) promotes a 
sense of ownership and 
aligns interests with the 
Group.

Executive Directors receive 
benefits in line with market 
practice, and these include 
life assurance, private 
medical insurance, company 
car or car allowance and, 
where relevant, relocation 
expenses.
Other benefits may be 
provided based on individual 
circumstances

The current Chief Executive 
does not receive pension 
benefits. For new 
appointments the Group 
may offer participation in a 
defined contribution 
pension plan or may permit 
Executive Directors to take 
a cash supplement instead 
of contributions to a 
pension plan.

The SAYE is an HMRC tax 
qualifying monthly savings 
scheme facilitating the 
purchase of shares at a 
discount by eligible 
employees. All qualifying 
employees are entitled to 
participate on the same basis. 

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Directors Remuneration Report continued

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Annual bonus 

Rewards performance 
against targets which 
support the strategic 
direction of the Group. 
Bonus deferral provides a 
retention element through 
share ownership and direct 
alignment with 
shareholders’ interests.

Maximum annual bonus 
opportunity is 125% of 
base salary.

Targets are set annually 
reflecting the Group’s 
strategy and aligned with 
key financial, strategic and/
or individual targets. 

At least 75% of the annual 
bonus is assessed against 
key financial performance 
metrics of the business 
and the balance may be 
based on non-financial 
strategic/personal 
objectives.

Financial metrics
Up to 10% of salary is paid 
at threshold performance. 
This increases to up to 
60% of the maximum 
potential for this element 
of the bonus for on-target 
performance and all of the 
maximum potential will be 
paid for maximum 
performance.

Non-financial strategic 
or individual metrics
Vesting of the non-
financial strategic or 
individual metrics will apply 
on a scale between 0% and 
100% based on the 
Committee’s assessment 
of the extent to which a 
non-financial performance 
metric has been met.

Awards are based on 
performance (typically 
measured over a year) 
against key financial 
targets and/or the delivery 
of strategic/individual 
objectives. 
Pay-out levels are 
determined by the 
Committee after the year 
end based on performance 
against 
those targets.
The Committee has 
discretion to amend the 
pay-out should any 
formulaic output not 
reflect the Committee’s 
assessment of overall 
business performance.
Executive Directors are 
required to defer one-third 
of any bonus award into 
shares for a two-year 
period. The Committee 
may decide to pay the 
whole of the bonus earned 
in cash where the amount 
to be deferred would, in the 
opinion of the Committee, 
be so small as to make 
deferral administratively 
burdensome. Deferred 
shares will typically take 
the form of nil-cost share 
options but may be 
structured as an 
alternative form of share 
award. 
Executive Directors may 
also be offered the 
opportunity to defer 
voluntarily up to 100% of 
any annual bonus award 
earned into shares for a 
two-year period.
Deferred bonus awards 
may be granted on the 
basis that the participant 
shall be entitled to an 
additional benefit (in cash 
or shares) in respect of 
dividends paid over the 
deferral period, calculated 
on such basis as the 
Committee shall 
determine. 
The vesting of the deferred 
shares is not subject to the 
satisfaction of any 
additional performance 
conditions. However, the 
Committee has the right to 
apply malus and/or 
clawback as set out below 
this table.

62

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Performance Share 
Plan (‘PSP’)

To incentivise Executive 
Directors, and to deliver 
genuine performance-
related pay, with a clear line 
of sight for Executives and 
direct alignment with 
shareholders’ interests.

The normal maximum 
award is 100% of salary in 
respect of a financial year. 
For awards in respect of 
2017 the maximum was 
80% of salary. The normal 
maximum award limit will 
only be exceeded in 
exceptional circumstances 
such as on the recruitment 
of an Executive Director 
and is subject to an overall 
limit of 200% of salary in 
respect of a financial year. 

Performance measures 
reflect underlying business 
performance.

Performance metrics and 
their weighting where 
there is more than one 
metric are reviewed 
annually to maintain 
appropriateness and 
relevance.

For awards in respect of 
2017 80% will be based on 
EPS performance and 20% 
TSR performance.

Awards will vest between 
25% and 100% for 
performance between 
‘threshold’ performance 
(the minimum level of 
performance that results 
in any level of vesting) and 
‘maximum’ performance.

The first PSP awards will be 
granted in respect of 2017.
Awards will be in the form 
of nil-cost share options, 
conditional shares or other 
such form as has the same 
economic effect. Awards 
will be granted with vesting 
dependent on the 
achievement of 
performance conditions 
set by the Committee, 
normally over at least a 
three year performance 
period. 
Awards will usually be 
subject to a two year 
holding period following 
the end of the 
performance period, and 
shares will typically not be 
released to participants 
until the end of any such 
holding period.
Awards under the PSP may 
be granted on the basis 
that the participant shall be 
entitled to an additional 
benefit (in cash or shares) 
in respect of dividends paid 
over the holding period. 
This amount shall be 
calculated on such basis as 
the Committee 
determines.
The Committee has the 
right to apply malus and/or 
clawback as set out below 
this table. 

63

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Directors Remuneration Report continued

MALUS AND CLAWBACK
Prior to the vesting of an annual bonus or PSP award, the Remuneration Committee may operate ‘malus’ to cancel the award.

For up to two years following the payment of an annual bonus award, the Remuneration Committee may operate ‘clawback’ to require the 
repayment of any cash amount paid or may cancel any deferred bonus award. For up to two years after the vesting of a PSP award, the 
Remuneration Committee may operate ‘clawback’ to cancel the award during the holding period (or require repayment of the award if it has been 
released prior to the end of the holding period). The circumstances in which malus and clawback may be operated are as follows:

•  The Executive’s gross negligence, fraud, dishonesty or other misconduct causing or contributing to the Group or any Group business having 

to restate all or a portion of its financial statements to a material degree;

•  The Executive’s conduct being such that it would entitle (or, where the Executive’s employment has terminated prior to the date on which the 

Board becomes aware of such act or omission, would have entitled) the Group to terminate the employment summarily;

•  A material error having occurred in determining whether any corporate or personal performance conditions relating to the bonus or PSP 

award have been met (or any other material error having occurred in calculating the sum that was awarded as a bonus or the size of the PSP 
award); or

•  Such other exceptional circumstances which, in the Remuneration Committee’s absolute discretion, justify such reimbursement being 

imposed.

CONSIDERATION OF EMPLOYMENT CONDITIONS ELSEWHERE IN THE GROUP
The Remuneration Committee considers the general basic salary increase, remuneration arrangements and employment conditions for the 
broader employee population when determining remuneration policy for the Executive Directors. 

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS 

Purpose and link to strategy

Approach of the Company

Fees are set at a level that reflects 
market conditions and are sufficient 
to attract individuals with 
appropriate knowledge and 
experience.

Fees are normally reviewed annually and approved by the Board.

Fees may include a basic fee and additional fees for further responsibilities (for example, chairmanship of 
committees or holding the office of Senior Independent Director). Fees are based on the level of fees 
paid at similar-sized UK listed companies and the time commitment and contribution expected for 
the role. 

Overall fees will remain within the limits set by the Articles of Association.

Non-Executive Directors cannot participate in any of the Company’s share schemes or annual bonus. 
Non-Executive Directors may be eligible to receive benefits such as the use of secretarial support, travel 
costs or other benefits that may be appropriate.

EXPLANATION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURES CHOSEN
Performance measures are selected that are aligned with the performance of the Group and the interests of shareholders. Stretching 
performance targets are set each year for the annual bonus and PSP awards. When setting these performance targets, the Remuneration 
Committee will take into account a number of different reference points, which may include the Group’s business plans and strategy and the 
economic environment. Full vesting will only occur for what the Remuneration Committee considers to be stretching performance. 

For 2018, 100% of the annual bonus award will be based on underlying Profit Before Tax, a key financial measure recognised by all colleagues 
throughout the business and directly linked to our strategy of focusing on profitability and growth. It is used as a KPI by the senior management 
team and is a key part of bonus schemes throughout the business.

Long-term performance measures provide a robust and transparent basis on which to measure the Group’s performance over the longer term 
and provide further alignment with the business strategy. PSP awards granted in respect of 2018 will be based on Earnings Per Share (‘EPS’) and 
relative Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’). EPS is currently the critical KPI for the Group, supporting its focus on profitability and growth. TSR is 
aligned with the Group’s focus on creating value for our shareholders. The awards granted under the PSP will be subject to a further underpin in 
accordance with which the level of vesting may be reduced if the Remuneration Committee does not consider it reflective of the overall financial 
performance of the Group over the performance period.

The Remuneration Committee retains the ability to adjust or set different performance measures or targets if events occur (such as a change in 
strategy, a material acquisition and/or a divestment of a Group business or a change in prevailing market conditions) which cause the 
Remuneration Committee to determine that the measures are no longer appropriate and that amendment is required so that they achieve their 
original purpose.

OPERATION OF SHARE PLANS
The Remuneration Committee retains the discretion to operate the Company’s share plans in accordance with their terms, including the ability 
to adjust awards and options in the event of a variation of share capital, demerger, delisting, special dividend or other event that may affect the 
Company’s share price, and to settle awards in cash.

64

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

POLICY FOR THE REMUNERATION OF EMPLOYEES MORE GENERALLY
The remuneration policy applied to the Executive Directors is similar to the policy for the wider senior management team in that a significant 
element of remuneration is dependent on Group performance. The key principles of the remuneration philosophy are applied consistently 
across the Group below this level, taking into account seniority and market practice.

ILLUSTRATIONS OF APPLICATION OF REMUNERATION POLICY
The charts below set out for the Chief Executive, Chief Operating Officer and Chief Financial Officer an illustration of the application for 2018 of 
the remuneration policy set out above. The charts show the split of remuneration between fixed pay, annual bonus (including any amount 
deferred) and PSP on the basis of minimum remuneration, remuneration receivable for performance in line with the Group’s expectations and 
maximum remuneration (not allowing for any share price appreciation). As Chris Payne was only a Director from September 2017, his benefits 
figure has been assumed to be the same as for Steve Wilson.

Steve Wilson

Tony Judge

Chris Payne

)
0
0
0
£
(
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r
l

a
t
o
T

1,500

1,200

900

600

300

0

£1,458K

26%

41%

£935K

10%

38%

£484K

100%

52%

33%

Minimum 
performance

Performance 
in line with 
expectations

Maximum 
performance

)
0
0
0
£
(
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r
l

a
t
o
T

1,500

1,200

900

600

300

0

£1,306K

26%

41%

£839K

10%

38%

£435K

100%

52%

33%

Minimum 
performance

Performance 
in line with 
expectations

Maximum 
performance

Base salary and bene�ts

Annual Bonus

LTIP

)
0
0
0
£
(
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r
l

a
t
o
T

1,500

1,200

900

600

300

0

£1,115K

25%

39%

£730K
10%

36%

£397K

100%

54%

36%

Minimum 
performance

Performance 
in line with 
expectations

Maximum 
performance

In illustrating the potential reward, the following assumptions have been made.

Minimum performance

Performance in line with 
expectations

Maximum performance

Fixed pay

Fixed elements of remuneration 
only – base salary, benefits and 
pension. 

Annual bonus 
(including any amount deferred)

PSP

No annual bonus award.

No vesting.

75% of salary awarded for  
achieving target performance. 

125% of salary awarded for 
achieving maximum performance. 

25% of maximum award vesting 
(equivalent to 20% of salary) for 
achieving target performance.
100% of maximum award vesting 
(equivalent to 80% of salary) for 
achieving maximum performance.

SERVICE AGREEMENTS
Executive Directors’ service agreements are on a rolling basis and may be terminated on 12 months’ notice by the Company or the Director. A 
new service agreement was entered into by Tony Judge on 31 March 2017 following his appointment as Chief Operating Officer and Executive 
Director of the Board effective from that date, having formerly been Commercial Director (not statutory) since 2012. Chris Payne entered into a 
service agreement with the Company on 13 September 2017 following his appointment as Chief Financial Officer and Executive Director of the 
Board effective from that date. Chris Payne is to be proposed for election at the 2018 AGM.

All Non-Executive Directors currently have fixed-term agreements by way of letters of appointment which may be terminated by the giving of 
one month’s notice. The agreements last for an initial period of three years and may then be extended for additional periods of three years, 
subject to re-election by shareholders at the relevant AGM. Philip Lawrence will enter into a new fixed term agreement with regard to his 
appointment on 1 June 2018 as Chairman of the Board, subject to his re-election as a Director of the Company at the 2018 AGM. This 
agreement will be terminable by either party on three months’ notice.

Amanda Aldridge was appointed to the Board as a Non-Executive Director on 1 February 2018 and entered into a fixed term agreement with the 
Company for a term of three years subject to earlier termination by either party on three months’ notice.

65

 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Directors Remuneration Report continued

RECRUITMENT REMUNERATION
The policy aims to facilitate the appointment of individuals of sufficient calibre to lead the business and execute the Group’s strategy effectively 
for the benefit of shareholders. When appointing a new Executive Director, the Remuneration Committee seeks to ensure that arrangements 
are in the best interests of the Group and not to pay more than is appropriate.

The Remuneration Committee will take into consideration a number of relevant factors, which may include the calibre of the individual, the 
candidate’s existing remuneration package, and the specific circumstances of the individual including the jurisdiction from which the candidate 
was recruited.

When hiring a new Executive Director, the Remuneration Committee will typically align the remuneration package with the above policy. The 
Remuneration Committee may include other elements of pay which it considers are appropriate; however, this discretion is capped and is 
subject to the principles and the limits referred to below:

•  Base salary will be set at a level appropriate to the role and the experience of the Executive Director being appointed. This may include 

agreement on future increases up to a market rate, in line with increased experience and/or responsibilities, subject to good performance, 
where it is considered appropriate.

•  Retirement and other benefits will be provided in line with the above policy.
•  The Remuneration Committee will not offer non-performance related incentive payments (for example a ‘guaranteed sign-on bonus’). 
•  Others elements may be included in the following circumstances:

–  an interim appointment being made to fill an Executive Director role on a short-term basis;
– 
– 

if exceptional circumstances require that the Chairman or a Non-Executive Director takes on an executive function on a short-term basis;
 if an Executive Director is recruited at a time in the year when it would be inappropriate to provide a bonus or long-term incentive award for 
that year as there would not be sufficient time to assess performance. Subject to the limit on variable remuneration set out below, the 
quantum in respect of the months employed during the year may be transferred to the subsequent year so that reward is provided on a 
fair and appropriate basis;
 if the Executive Director will be required to relocate in order to take up the position, it is the Company’s policy to allow reasonable 
relocation, travel and subsistence payments. Any such payments will be at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee. 

– 

•  The Remuneration Committee may also alter the performance measures, performance period, vesting period, deferral period and holding 
period of the annual bonus or PSP, if the Remuneration Committee determines that the circumstances of the recruitment merit such 
alteration. The rationale will be clearly explained in the following Directors Remuneration Report.

•  The maximum level of variable remuneration which may be granted (excluding ‘buyout’ awards as referred to below) is 325% of salary. 

Any share awards referred to in this section will be granted as far as possible under the Company’s existing share plans. If necessary, and subject 
to the limits referred to above, recruitment awards may be granted outside of these plans as permitted under the Listing Rules which allow for 
the grant of awards to facilitate, in unusual circumstances, the recruitment of an Executive Director.

The Remuneration Committee may make payments or awards in respect of hiring an employee to ‘buyout’ remuneration arrangements 
forfeited on leaving a previous employer. In doing so, the Remuneration Committee will take account of relevant factors including any 
performance conditions attached to the forfeited arrangements and the time over which they would have vested. The Remuneration 
Committee will generally seek to structure buyout awards or payments on a like-for-like basis to the remuneration arrangements forfeited. Any 
such payments or awards are limited to the expected value of the forfeited awards. Where considered appropriate, such special recruitment 
awards will be liable to forfeiture or ‘malus’ and/or ‘clawback’ on early departure.

Where a position is filled internally, any ongoing remuneration obligations or outstanding variable pay elements shall be allowed to continue 
according to the original terms.

Fees payable to a newly appointed Chairman or Non-Executive Director will be in line with the fee policy in place at the time of appointment.

Details of the Non-Executive Directors’ appointment dates are set out below:

Non-Executive Director

Dick Peters
Andrew Eastgate
Philip Lawrence
Amanda Aldridge

Date of appointment

1 December 2005
17 May 2010
1 June 2015
1 February 2018

Expiry of 
current term

31 May 2018*
May 2019**
31 May 2018***
31 Jan 2021****

Mr Peters is due to step down from the Board on 31 May 2018 after 12 years as a member of the Board and will not therefore be standing for re-election.

*  
**   Mr Eastgate was re-elected at the 2017 AGM.
***  

It is intended that Mr Lawrence will be appointed as Chairman of the Board on 31 May 2018. Mr Lawrence is to be proposed for re-election as a Director at the 2018 AGM. 
The fee payable to Mr Lawrence from 1 June 2018 has been set at £143,500 per annum which the Remuneration Committee considered to be an appropriate rate and 
which was market competitive to secure Mr Lawrence’s services as Chairman.

****  Amanda Aldridge was appointed to the Board on 1 February 2018 and will be proposed for election at the AGM.

66

 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION
Certain information provided in this part of the Directors Remuneration Report is subject to audit. This is annotated as audited. Any information 
not annotated as audited is unaudited.

Single total figure of remuneration for each Director
The table below reports the total remuneration receivable in respect of qualifying services by each of the Executive Directors for the years 2017 
and 2016.

Executive Directors remuneration as a single figure – 2017 (audited)

Executive Directors

Steve Wilson
Tony Judge*
Chris Payne**

Base salary/
fees
2017
£000

Non-salary
benefits
2017
£000

Annual
performance
bonus
2017
£000

Share-based
incentive
schemes
2017
£000

475
319
95

889

9
10
8

27

391
350
–

741

245
218
–

463

Pension
related
benefits
2017
£000

–
–
11

11

Other 
2017
£000

–
–
133

133

Total
2017
£000

1,120
897
247

2,264

*  Tony Judge was appointed as an Executive Director on 31 March 2017 and his annual salary was set at £425,000 although this was effective from 1 January 2017. The table 

above reflects the pro-rata amount of salary received since his appointment but 100% of annual bonus and amount in respect of share based incentive schemes.

**  Chris Payne was appointed as an Executive Director on 13 September 2017 on an initial salary of £325,000. The figures above for Chris Payne reflect the pro-rata amounts 

received since his appointment. Chris Payne forfeited variable pay arrangements when he left his previous role and the Company therefore agreed to pay a bonus of 
£133,000 when he commenced his employment with the Company.

Executive Directors remuneration as a single figure – 2016 (audited)

Executive Directors

Steve Wilson 
Tony Brewer

Base salary/
fees
2016
£000

Non-salary
benefits
2016
£000

Annual
performance
bonus
2016
£000

Share-based
incentive
schemes
2016
£000

403
393

796

15
16

31

386
–

386

263
328

591

Pension
related
benefits
2016
£000

_
–

–

Termination 
payment 
2016
£000

_
1,143

1,143

Total
2016
£000

1,067
1,880

2,947

*  Tony Brewer resigned as a Director on 14 September 2016. 

*  Steve Wilson was appointed as Chief Executive on 14 September 2016 although his salary was not increased to reflect his new appointment until 1 January 2017.

*  Share based incentives vested in respect of performance to the year ended 31 December 2016 in the form of Co-Investment Plan (“CIP”) awards. These CIP awards  
granted on 1 April 2014 vested on 1 April 2017. The mid-market closing share price on 3 April 2017 was 623 pence and this is the share price that has been used to  
calculate the values above. 

The table below reports the total remuneration receivable in respect of qualifying services by each of the Non-Executive Directors for the years 
2017 and 2016.
Non-Executive Directors remuneration as a single figure – 2017 (audited)

Non-Executive Directors

Andrew Eastgate
Philip Lawrence* 
Dick Peters

Non-salary
benefits
2017
£000

Annual
performance
bonus
2017
£000

Share-based
incentive
schemes
2017
£000

–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

Base fees
2017
£000

55
45
110

210

Pension
related
benefits
2017
£000

–
–
–

–

*  Philip Lawrence’s fees during 2017 were paid to the Coal Authority, which releases him to perform his duties as a Non-Executive Director.

Total
2017
£000

55
45
110

210

67

 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Directors Remuneration Report continued

Non-Executive Directors remuneration as a single figure – 2016 (audited)

Non-Executive Directors

Andrew Eastgate
Philip Lawrence*
Dick Peters

Base/fees
2016
£000

55
45
110

210

Non-salary
benefits
2016
£000

Annual
performance
bonus
2016
£000

Share-based
incentive
schemes
2016
£000

–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

Pension
related
benefits
2016
£000

–
–
–

–

Total
2016
£000

55
45
110

210

*  Philip Lawrence’s fees during 2016 were paid to the Coal Authority, which releases him to perform his duties as a Non-Executive Director.

External appointments
Steve Wilson was appointed a Non-Executive Director of Conviviality Plc on 31 January 2014. He received fees of £40,000 per annum during 
2016 and £55,000 per annum during 2017 which he retained. 

Individual elements of remuneration
The figures in the single figure table are derived from the following:

Base salary and fees 

Non-salary benefits 

Annual performance bonus 

The amount of salary/fees received in the financial period (up to the date of resignation as a Director in 
the case of Tony Brewer for 2016 and from the date of appointment, respectively, for each of Tony 
Judge and Chris Payne).

The taxable value of benefits received in the financial period (up to the date of resignation as a Director 
in the case of Tony Brewer for 2016 and from the date of appointment, respectively, for each of Tony 
Judge and Chris Payne). These are car benefit, private medical insurance and other benefits deemed 
to be an employment benefit.

The amount of performance related bonus received in respect of the financial period in respect of 
duties as an Executive Director including the value attributable to shares awarded under the DBP as 
part of the bonus earned that year.

Pension related benefits 

The amount of employer contribution to a scheme based on a fixed percentage of base salary. 

Share-based incentive schemes 

The value of Co-Investment Plan (‘CIP’) awards that vest in respect of the financial period and the value 
of Save-As-You-Earn (‘SAYE’) options granted in the financial period.

Base salaries and fees
The Executive Directors received no increase to their base salary in 2017. A cost of living increase of 2% of base salary was otherwise awarded in 
2017 to all UK employees of the Group earning less than £42,500 per annum.

No changes were made to Chairman or Non-Executive Directors fees in 2017. 

Chairman fee
Base fee
Additional fee for 

– Chairmanship of the Remuneration Committee 
– Chairmanship of the Audit Committee
– Senior Independent Director

2017
£000

110
40
5
5
10

2016
£000

110
40
5
5
10

Increase
%

0%
0%
0%
0%
 0%

Annual performance bonus
For 2017, the Executive Directors were awarded a maximum annual bonus opportunity equal to 125% of salary. The bonus was assessed against 
a Group underlying Profit Before Tax performance metric. The following table sets out the bonus earned by the Executive Directors for 2017 and 
how this reflects performance for the year.

Performance metric

Group Profit Before Tax

Proportion of 
bonus 
determined by 
metric

Threshold 
performance

Target 
performance

Maximum 
performance

Actual 
performance

Bonus earned 
(% max)

100%

£37.1m

£41.9m

£50.28m

£43.118m

65.82%

The bonus paid to Chris Payne formed part of his take on arrangements under which he was compensated for bonus and incentives foregone 
from his previous employment. Under this arrangement it was agreed that his bonus for 2017 would be £133,000 paid in cash.

68

 
 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Share based payments vesting in respect of the financial period
Awards granted under the CIP in 2015 vested in respect of the performance year ended 31 December 2017. The awards were subject to two 
performance conditions, based on EPS growth (80% of the award) and relative TSR (20% of the award). The performance outcome and 
consequent vesting was as follows:

EPS growth

Threshold: 0:6 : 1 match
Maximum: 2: 1 match
Outcome
Vesting 

Proportion of award vesting 

Steve Wilson
Tony Judge
Tony Brewer

EPS
CAGR over three years

3% + RPI
6% + RPI
10.8%
100% of EPS element

80%

TSR
Relative performance against FTSE Small Cap 

Median 
Upper quartile 
Ranked 78th 
87.58% of TSR element

17.5%

Shares granted

Shares vesting 

44,124
39,326
34,667

43,028
38,349
33,806

Value of shares 
vesting 

£244,614
£218,014
£192,187

Value is based on the average share price for the final quarter of the financial year which was 568.5p based on the mid-market closing share price. 
The awards for Tony Brewer are pro-rated to reflect the terms of his exit under which he retained his CIP shares.

PSP awards granted during the financial period 
PSP awards were granted to the Executive Directors in 2017 subject to EPS and TSR metrics.

Steve Wilson
Tony Judge
Chis Payne

Number of 
shares under 
option

70,789
63,338
48,435

182,562

Value of 
Award  
£000 

380
340
260

980

% of salary 

Date of Grant 

Holding period

80
80
80

5 July 2017
5 July 2017
25 September 2017 

2 years
2 years
2 years

The share price used to determine the number of shares under the PSP was 536.8 pence, being the average mid-market closing share price for 
the five business days prior to the date of Steve Wilson and Tony Judge’s award. The same share price was used to determine the number of 
shares under Chris Payne’s award. 

There are two performance conditions attaching to the PSP award: an EPS condition which accounts for 80% of the award and a TSR condition 
which accounts for 20% of the award.

The EPS target required for maximum vesting was set at 8% annual growth over the three years to 31 December 2019. This is above current 
consensus market expectations and above the internal business plan and at a level which the Remuneration Committee considers to be 
appropriate given the level of stretch within the forecast numbers. Threshold performance at which 25% of the award vests is EPS growth of 5% 
per annum. The Remuneration Committee is satisfied that the EPS target range appropriately reflects business risks and uncertainties.

The amount of the award which vests is also based on a TSR condition. The TSR for the period of three financial years commencing with the 
financial year in which the award is granted is calculated for both the Company and a comparator group. The comparator group is constituted 
from the companies making up the FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts) at the start of the relevant period of three financial years. 
If the Company’s TSR is below the median TSR for the comparative group then none of the award is vested. If the Company’s TSR is equal to the 
median of the TSR of the comparator’s group then 25% of the award shall vest. If the Company’s TSR is between the median and upper quartile 
of the TSR of the comparator’s group then between 25% and 100% of the award shall vest on a straight-line basis. If the Company’s TSR is above 
the upper quartile of the TSR of the comparators group then 100% of the award shall vest. 

69

 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Directors Remuneration Report continued

Dilution
The Remuneration Committee supports the Investment Association (‘IA’) guidelines regarding dilution and regularly monitors compliance with 
these requirements. The share plan rules limit the number of newly issued shares which can be granted in a ten-year period to 10% of the issued 
share capital under all employee share plans and 5% under the discretionary share plans.

As at the date of this report, the Company’s usage of shares against the limits detailed above in respect of the all employee schemes was 0.84% 
of the issued share capital (excluding treasury shares) and in respect of grants under discretionary plans was 0% of issued capital (excluding 
treasury shares). It is the Remuneration Committee’s intention that options exercised under the SAYE scheme will continue to be satisfied by 
shares held in treasury. 

Further information on share-based payments is set out in note 21 to the financial statements.

Pension related benefits
No Executive Director received any pension benefit during the financial period other than Chris Payne who received pension contributions from 
the Company equivalent to 11% of his base salary from the date of his appointment

Payments to past Directors
No payments were made to past Directors during the financial period other than in respect of Tony Brewer who resigned as a Director on 14 
September 2016. Tony Brewer was permitted to retain his CIP awards under the terms of the plan rules and the 2014 policy and the awards made 
to him under the 2014 CIP vested pro-rated for time served at the normal vesting date subject to the outcome of the relevant performance 
metrics. Under the 2014 CIP granted on 1 April 2014 Tony Brewer was granted an award over 59,222 ordinary shares of which a proportionate 
award of 53,386 ordinary shares vested. Similarly, Tony Brewer was permitted to retain CIP awards awarded in 2015 and 2016 and these awards 
will also vest pro-rated subject to the outcome of the relevant performance metrics.
.
Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests (audited)
In order to align the interests of the Executive Directors with those of the Company’s shareholders, the Remuneration Committee is keen to 
encourage Executive Directors to increase their shareholdings in the Company. The Executive Directors are required to have a beneficial 
interest (including family) in the ordinary shares of the Company equivalent in value to two times annual base salary. Executive Directors are 
required to retain half of the net of tax vested shares under all of the Company’s share plans until the guideline is met.

The interests of Directors and their connected persons in the Company’s ordinary shares as at 31 December 2017 were as set out below. So far 
as the Company is aware there have been no changes to those interests between 31 December 2017 and the date of signing of these financial 
statements and reports.

Type

Grant date

Option price

Share price at 
grant

Owned 
outright

Unvested and 
subject to 
performance 
conditions

Unvested and 
not subject to 
performance 
conditions

Vesting 
date

Total as at 
31 December 
2017

Steve Wilson
Steve Wilson

Tony Judge 

Ordinary Shares
PSP Shares
2016 CIP
2015 CIP 
2014 ·SAYE

Ordinary Shares
PSP Shares
2016 CIP
2015 CIP
2015 SAYE

–
5 July 2017
6 May 2016
1 May 2015
8 May 2014

–
5 July 2017
6 May 2016
1 May 2015
5 May 2015

Chris Payne

PSP Shares 25 Sept 2017

Andrew Eastgate Ordinary Shares

Philip Lawrence

Ordinary Shares

Dick Peters

Ordinary Shares

–

–

–

–
Nil
Nil
Nil
381p

–
Nil
Nil
Nil
400.2p

Nil

–

–

–

–
536p
477p
466p
476p

–
536p
477p
466p
461p

536p

–

–

–

614,244
–
–
–
–

115,696
–
–
–
–

–
70,789
40,886
44,124
–

–

63,338  
36,567 
39,326
–

–
–
– March 2020
May 2019
–
May 2018
–
July 2019
7,874

–
–
– March 2020
May 2019
–
May 2018 
–
July 2020
8,823

–

48,435

– March 2020

1,000

–

5,000

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

614,244*
70,789
40,886
44,124
7,874

115,696
63,338
36,567
39,326
8,823

48,435

1,000

–

5,000

*  Steve Wilson as at 31 December 2017 held shares in excess of the shareholding guideline (based on the Company’s closing mid-market share price on 31 December 2017).

70

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

The graph below shows the value at 31 December 2017 of £100 invested in the Company on 1 January 2009 compared to the value of £100 
invested in the FTSE SmallCap Index, making the assumption that dividends are reinvested to purchase additional equity.

500

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

)
0
0
1
o
t
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
(

n
r
u
t
e
R

l

r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

l

a
t
o
T

0
31 Dec 08 

31 Dec 09 

31 Dec 10 

31 Dec 11 

31 Dec 12 

31 Dec 13 

31 Dec 14 

31 Dec 15 

31 Dec 16 

31 Dec 17

Headlam Group PLC                  FTSE SmallCap

The FTSE SmallCap Index has been selected as a comparator due to the Company being a constituent member within the Household Goods & 
Home Construction sector. This allows comparison of the Company’s performance against the performance of the Index as a whole.

Chief Executive remuneration table
The table below sets out the remuneration of the Chief Executive for the previous nine financial periods. Tony Brewer resigned as a Director on 
14 September 2016. The 2016 figures in the table below reflect his remuneration earned from the start of 2016 until the date of his resignation as 
a Director.

Period

2017
2016

2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010 
2009 

Steve Wilson 
Steve Wilson
Tony Brewer 
Tony Brewer
Tony Brewer
Tony Brewer
Tony Brewer
Tony Brewer
Tony Brewer
Tony Brewer

*   This remuneration is for the full year.
**   This remuneration is for a part year and does not include a termination payment.

Chief Executive 
single figure of 
total 
remuneration 
£000

Annual bonus 
(% of maximum 
opportunity) 

1,120
1,067*
737**
1,175
1,134
927
1,347
1,095
1,179
1,027

65.82
76.8
n/a
87.1
81.4
42.7
65.5
66.5
64.7
77.0

Percentage change in Chief Executive remuneration
The table below shows the percentage change in the Chief Executive’s remuneration and the Company’s employees as a whole between the 
financial periods 2017 and 2016.

Percentage increase/(decrease) in remuneration in 2017 compared with 2016

Salary and fees
All taxable benefits
Annual bonuses

Chief Executive*

15.2%
0%
1.2%

*  The increase in Steve Wilson’s remuneration between the financial periods 2017 and 2016 is reflective of his promotion to Chief Executive. 

Long-term 
incentive 
vesting rates 
against 
maximum 
opportunity %

97.5
98.6
88.9
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

Total 
Employees

2%
0%
(13 %)

71

 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Directors Remuneration Report continued

Relative importance of spend on pay
The table below shows the overall expenditure on dividends and on pay as a whole across the Company along with the percentage change 
between each.

Dividends
Overall expenditure on pay

2017
£000

25,729
94,204

2016
£000

22,464
96,772

% change

14.5%
(2.65%)

Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2018
Details of how the Company will operate the remuneration policy in 2018 is provided below (subject to shareholder approval of the Directors 
Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2017).

Base salaries and fees for 2018
Other than in respect of Chris Payne whose annual salary increased from £325,000 per annum in 2017 to £350,000 per annum in 2018 with 
effect from 1 March 2018 (equating to £346,000 over the 12 months ending 31 December 2018) because his salary was set at a lower rate for  
the first six months of his employment and increased thereafter, none of the Executive Directors will receive any increase in base salary for 2018.

Steve Wilson
Tony Judge
Chris Payne

2018
£000

475
425
346

2017
£000

475
425
325

Increase
%

0
0
6

There are no increases to Non-Executive Director fees for 2018 save in respect of the appointment of Philip Lawrence as Non-Executive 
Chairman who will receive a fee of £143,500 per annum upon his appointment as Non-Executive Chairman from 1 June 2018. In addition, 
Amanda Aldridge who joined the Board as Non-Executive Director with effect from 1 February 2018 will be paid a fee of £45,000 per annum  
rising to £52,500 per annum on 1 June 2018 when she assumes the role of chair of the Audit Committee.

Annual bonus
The maximum annual bonus opportunity for 2018 will remain at 125% of salary. The bonus will be subject to the Company’s underlying Profit 
Before Tax performance. In-line with best practice, one third of any amount earned will be deferred into shares which vest two years after the 
date on which the annual bonus pay-out is determined.

PSP
Awards in respect of 2018 will be granted in the form of nil cost options over ordinary shares at the level of 80% of salary, subject to EPS and TSR 
metrics as described below:

Vesting (% of maximum)

0%
25%
100%

Straight-line vesting between points.

EPS growth 
(80% of award)

Less than 5% p.a.
5% p.a.
8% p.a.

TSR relative to the 
constituents of the FTSE 
SmallCap Index
(20% of award)

Below median
Median
Upper quartile

To balance the overall long-term nature of the package, in line with best practice, awards will be subject to a two-year holding period following the 
date of vesting. 

72

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Remuneration Committee activity 
The Board approved the terms of reference delegating certain responsibilities to the Remuneration Committee. The terms of reference are 
reviewed periodically, most recently in April 2016, and are available on the Group’s website within the Governance section at www.headlam.com. 
The Remuneration Committee comprises the Chairman and each of the other Non-Executive Directors and attendance was as follows:

Members

Philip Lawrence
Dick Peters*
Andrew Eastgate 

Meetings attended

Eligible to attend

5
5
5

5
5
5

*  Dick Peters will step down from the Remuneration Committee on 31 May 2018. Amanda Aldridge was appointed to the Remuneration Committee with effect from  

1 February 2018.

Other Directors may attend Remuneration Committee meetings by invitation but no one attending a Remuneration Committee meeting may 
participate in discussions relating to their own terms and conditions of service or remuneration.

The Remuneration Committee has responsibility for:

•  Selecting the framework and policy for Executive Directors remuneration and determining the remuneration packages for the Executive 

Directors and Chairman. 

•  Monitoring the level and structure of remuneration for the Senior Management team.
•  Approving the design and operation of the Company’s short-term and long-term incentive arrangements. This includes agreeing the targets 

that are applied to awards made to Executive Directors and the Senior Management team.

•  Administering share plans as required.

Matters discussed at the five meetings of the Remuneration Committee were as follows:

Meeting Date

Key agenda items 

16 January 2017

1 March 2017

31 March 2017

Approval of letter to substantial shareholders consulting on proposed new remuneration policy
Approval of new form of service agreement for Executive Directors

Approval of documents for SAYE

Feedback from consultation on new remuneration policy from substantial shareholders 
Approval of remuneration package for Tony Judge on his appointment to the Board 
Approval of deferred bonus rules and PSP rules for submission to AGM
CIP vesting
Annual bonus targets for 2017

8 June 2017

20 Sept 2017

Implementation of the PSP and grant of the first award

Grant of a PSP award to Chris Payne

Advisers
Deloitte LLP were appointed as advisers to the Remuneration Committee in October 2016 to advise on the new remuneration policy and on an 
ongoing basis. Deloitte’s fees in respect of advice to the Remuneration Committee during the period ended 31 December 2017 were £16,750 
excluding VAT and were charged on a time and disbursements basis or fixed fee depending on the nature of the advice. Deloitte also provided 
advice to the Company during the period in relation to share plans and tax matters. Deloitte is a founder member of the Remuneration 
Consultants Group and as such voluntarily operates under its Code of Conduct in relation to executive remuneration in the UK.  
The Remuneration Committee is satisfied that all advice received was objective and independent. 

The Remuneration Committee also receives input and advice from the Company Secretary and the People Director.

Statement of shareholders’ votes
The following table sets out the results of the advisory vote on the 2016 Annual Report on remuneration at the 2017 AGM and binding vote on 
the remuneration policy at the 2017 AGM. The table also sets out the votes cast in favour of adopting each of the Performance Share Plan and 
the Deferred Bonus Plan.

For 
%

Against 
%

Withheld 

2016 Directors Remuneration Report

2017 Remuneration Policy

2017 Deferred Bonus Plan

2017 Performance Share Plan

99.51

99.34

99.53

97.26

0.49

0.66

0.47

2.74

310,202

160,202

3,899

122,728

This report has been approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by Andrew Eastgate, Chairman of the  
Remuneration Committee.

Andrew Eastgate
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

6 March 2018

73

 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Other Statutory Disclosures

The Directors present their report, together with the audited financial statements, for the year ended 31 December 2017. This report, which has 
been prepared solely for the Company’s shareholders, contains additional information which the Directors are required by law and regulation to 
include within the Annual Report and Accounts.

In conjunction with the information from the Chairman’s Statement on page 46 to the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities on page 78 this 
section constitutes the Directors Report in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

PRINCIPAL ACTIVITIES
The principal activities of the Group are wholly aligned to the sales, marketing, supply and distribution of floorcoverings and certain other 
ancillary products. The acquisition of the entire issued share capital of Domus Group of Companies Limited (‘Domus’) on 7 December 2017 
significantly increased the Company’s presence in the commercial specification market to supplement and complement the Company’s core 
activities. Domus is the UK’s leading specification consultant and supplier of hard surfaces for premium construction and refurbishment 
projects. The principal activity of the Company is that of a holding company and its subsidiaries are listed on page 128. Further details of the 
Group’s activities and future plans are set out in the Strategic Report on pages 9 to 41. 

Headlam Group plc is a company incorporated and domiciled in the UK. The address of the registered office is PO Box 1, Gorsey Lane, Coleshill, 
Birmingham, B46 1LW.

STRATEGIC REPORT AND FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS
The Group is required by the Companies Act 2006 to include a Strategic Report in this document. The information that fulfils the requirements 
of the Strategic Report can be found on the inside front cover to page 41, which is incorporated in this report by reference.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STATEMENT
The Corporate Governance Statement as required by the Financial Conduct Authority’s Disclosure and Transparency Rules (DTR) 7.2.1 is set out 
on page 48 and is incorporated into this report by reference.

ACQUISITIONS AND POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS
Details of the Domus acquisition and other acquisitions made in 2017 and post the balance sheet date are given in note 24 to the financial 
statements, which should be treated as forming part of this report. 

RESULTS AND ORDINARY DIVIDENDS
The results for the year and financial position at 31 December 2017 are shown in the Consolidated Income Statement on page 84 and 
Statements of Financial Position on page 86.

An interim ordinary dividend of 7.55p per share (2016: 6.70p) was paid on 1 January 2018 to shareholders on the register at the close of business 
on 1 December 2017. The Directors propose a final ordinary dividend of 17.25p per ordinary share (2016: 15.85p), to be paid on 6 July 2018 to 
shareholders on the register of members at the close of business on 1 June 2018, the associated ex-dividend date being 31 May 2018.

This would bring the total ordinary dividend for the year to 24.80p per ordinary share (2016: 22.55p). The payment of the final ordinary dividend is 
subject to shareholder approval at the Annual General Meeting (‘AGM’).

SHARE CAPITAL
As at 31 December 2017, the issued share capital of the Company comprised a single class of ordinary shares of 5p each. 

The Company’s ordinary shares are listed on the Main Market of the London Stock Exchange. No ordinary shares were issued during the year and 
there were no additions to treasury shares. The reduction in treasury shares related to transfers in connection with the SAYE scheme. The 
balance of shares in treasury stock following the transfers during 2017 was 512,230 ordinary shares of 5p each.

Details of the Company’s share capital are set out in note 22 to the financial statements, which should be treated as forming part of this report.
Subject to the provisions of the Articles of Associate and the Companies Act 2006, shares may be issued with such rights or restrictions as the 
Company may by ordinary resolution determine or, if the Company has not so determined, as the Directors may decide. There are, however, no 
restrictions on the transfer of securities in the Company, except that certain restrictions may from time to time be imposed by law or regulation, 
for example, insider trading laws, and pursuant to the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority (the ‘Listing Rules’), and the Market Abuse 
Regulation, whereby certain employees require the approval of the Company to deal in the Company’s shares.

74

 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

On a show of hands at a general meeting of the Company every holder of ordinary shares present in person and entitled to vote shall have one 
vote, and on a poll every member present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote shall have one vote for every ordinary share held. The Notice 
of AGM specifies deadlines for exercising voting rights and appointing a proxy or proxies to vote in relation to resolutions to be passed at the 
AGM. All proxy votes are counted and the numbers for, against or withheld in relation to each resolution are announced at the AGM and published 
on the Company’s website after the meeting. The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive the Annual Report and Accounts, to attend 
and speak at general meetings of the Company, to appoint proxies and to exercise voting rights. The Company is not aware of any agreements 
between holders of securities that may result in restrictions on voting rights. Further shareholder information is available in the Notice of AGM 
which contains explanations as to the resolutions proposed..

Subject to certain limits, at the AGM on 25 May 2017, the Directors were granted general authority to allot shares in the Company together with 
an authority to allot shares in the Company in connection with a rights issue and in respect of cash without first offering them to existing 
shareholders. The Directors will be seeking to renew these authorities to allot unissued shares and to disapply statutory pre-emption rights at 
the forthcoming AGM. Further details are set out in the Notice of AGM which is contained in a separate circular to shareholders.

At the AGM on 25 May 2017, the Company was given the authority to purchase shares in the Company up to 10% of the issued share capital. 

Whilst no shares have been purchased under the buyback authority by the Company during the year, the Directors will be seeking to renew this 
authority for the Company to purchase its ordinary shares at the forthcoming AGM.

Further details are set out in the Notice of AGM sent in a circular to shareholders.

DIRECTORS
Biographies of Directors currently serving on the Board are set out on pages 44 and 45.

Changes to the Board during the period are set out in the Corporate Governance Report on page 48. Details of Directors’ service agreements 
are set out below and  in the Directors Remuneration Report on page 65.

The Directors shall be not less than three and not more than eight in number, although the Company may by ordinary resolution vary these 
numbers. Directors may be appointed by the ordinary resolution of the shareholders or by the Board. A Director appointed by the Board holds 
office only until the next AGM of the Company after their appointment, at which they are then eligible to stand for election.

The table below shows the dates of appointment and the most recent re-election dates for Directors.

Executive Directors
Steve Wilson

Tony Judge

Chris Payne

Non-Executive Directors
Dick Peters*
Andrew Eastgate
Philip Lawrence
Amanda Aldridge

* 

 Due to retire on 31 May 2018

Date of 
appointment

December 1991

31 March 2017

Date of 
original letter 
of appointment/
service agreement

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment/
service agreement

n/a

n/a

3 March 2017

31 March 2017

13 September 2017

n/a 13 September 2017

1 December 2005
17 May 2010
1 June 2015
1 February 2018

1 December 2005
27 April 2010
18 June 2015
12 January 2018

10 March 2015
17 May 2014
1 June 2015
12 January 2018

Next due
for re-election

May 2018

May 2020

May 2018

n/a
n/a
May 2018
May 2018

CHANGE OF CONTROL
The Group has entered into certain agreements that may take effect, alter or terminate upon a change of control of the Company following a 
takeover bid. The significant agreements in this respect are the Group’s bank facility and certain of its employee share schemes. The Group’s 
term loan facilities include a provision such that, in the event of a change of control, the lender may cancel all or any part of the facility and/or 
declare that all amounts outstanding under the facility are immediately due and payable by the Group. Outstanding options granted under the 
SAYE scheme may be exercised within a period of six months from a change of control of the Company following a takeover taking place.

Details regarding Directors’ service agreements are included within the Directors Remuneration Report.

SUBSTANTIAL INTERESTS IN VOTING RIGHTS
Notifications of the following voting interests in the Company’s ordinary share capital had been received by the Company (in accordance with 
Chapter 5 of the DTR). The information shown below was correct at the time of disclosure. However, the date received may not have been within 
the current financial reporting period and the percentages shown (as provided at the time of disclosure) have not been recalculated based on the 
issued share capital at the period end. It should also be noted that these holdings may have changed since the Company was notified; however, 
notification of any change is not required until the next notifiable threshold is crossed.

75

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Other Statutory Disclosures continued

The table below reflects the notifications received by the Company up to 1 March 2018 (being the latest practical date prior to the date of  
this report).

ORDINARY SHARES OF 5 PENCE EACH

Franklin Templeton Institutional, LLC
Heronbridge Investment Management LLP
BlackRock Inc
Ruffer LLP
Rathbone Brothers plc
Aggregate of Standard Life Aberdeen plc affiliated management entities
Investec Asset Management Limited
Canaccord Genuity Group Inc

1 March 2018 
aggregate total 
voting rights

% of total 
voting rights at 
1 March 2018

Indirect/direct

13,532,822
4,209,552
n/a
4,217,009
4,070,078
4,290,191
4,213,538
2,770,314

15.95
5.04
below 5%
4.97
4.87
5.05
4.97
3.27

indirect
direct
indirect
direct
indirect
indirect
indirect
indirect

Pursuant to DTR 5.1.2 a person must notify the issuer of the percentage of the voting rights he holds as shareholder or holds or is deemed to 
hold through his direct or indirect holding of financial instruments (or a combination of such holdings) if the percentage of those voting rights 
reaches, exceeds or falls below 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10% and each 1% threshold thereafter up to 100%.

RIGHTS UNDER EMPLOYEES’ SHARE SCHEMES
As at 31 December 2017, Kleinwort Hambros, as trustee of the Headlam Group Employee Trust Company Limited (‘Trust’) which acts as the 
trustee of the Headlam Group Co-investment Plan 2008 (‘CIP’), which was approved by shareholders on 20 June 2008, held 341,891 shares, 
approximately 0.4% of the issued share capital of the Company, on trust for the benefit of the Directors and certain senior managers of the 
Group. Kleinwort Hambros waives the dividends payable in respect of these shares.

As at the same date, the Headlam Group Employee Trust Company Limited held 512,330 shares, approximately 0.6% of the issued share capital 
of the Company, which may be used to fulfil the exercise of SAYE options, the dividend payable in respect of these shares similarly being waived.

SECURITIES CARRYING SPECIAL RIGHTS 
There are no requirements for prior approval of any transfers and no person holds securities in the Company carrying special rights with regard 
to control of the Company.

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS AND INDEMNITY ARRANGEMENTS
At no time during the year did any Director hold a material interest in any contract of significance with the Company or any of its subsidiary 
undertakings, other than service agreements between each Executive Director and the Company. In addition, the Company has purchased and 
maintained throughout the year Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance in respect of itself and its Directors. The Directors also have the 
benefit of the indemnity provision contained in the Company’s Articles of Association. This provision extends to include the Directors of 
Headlam Group Pension Trustees Limited, a corporate trustee of the Scheme, in respect of liabilities that may attach to them in their capacity  
as Directors of that corporate trustee. These provisions were in force throughout the year and are currently in force. Details of Directors 
remuneration, service agreements, and interests in the shares of the Company are set out in the Directors Remuneration Report.

MODERN SLAVERY STATEMENT
We support the aims of the Modern Slavery Act and have published our disclosure on our website. Following further investigations of our supply 
chain we will be updating our disclosure.

ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY AND MANDATORY GREENHOUSE GAS EMISSIONS REPORTING
Our environmental policy is included within the Strategic Report. The Board recognises that a responsible approach at the heart of the business 
is key to sustainable growth and a good reputation. 

Information on energy consumption, water usage and treatment of waste is included within the report on Corporate Responsibility. 

DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO AUDITOR
So far as each Director is aware, there is no audit information relevant to the preparation of the Auditor’s report of which the Auditor is unaware 
and each Director has taken all the steps that they ought to have taken as Directors to make themselves aware of any relevant audit information 
and to establish that the Auditor is aware of that information. 

76

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

DIRECTORS’ AND AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
A statement by the Directors on their responsibilities in respect of the Annual Report and Accounts is given on page 78 and a statement by the 
Auditor on their responsibilities is given on page 83.

POLITICAL DONATIONS AND EXPENDITURE
The Company’s policy is not to make any donations for political purposes in the UK or to donate to EU political parties or incur EU political 
expenditure. Accordingly, neither the Company nor its subsidiaries made any political donations or incurred political expenditure in the financial 
period under review (2016: £nil).

CHARITABLE CONTRIBUTIONS
Details are given on page 41 of the Corporate Responsibility section of the Strategic Report.

AMENDMENT OF ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION
The Company’s Articles of Association may only be amended by a special resolution at a general meeting of shareholders.

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The disclosures required in relation to the use of financial instruments by the Group together with details of our treasury policy and management 
are set out in note 23 to the financial statements on pages 119 to 124.

GOING CONCERN
The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out in the 
Strategic Report. The financial position of the Group is described on page 12. In addition, note 23 to the financial statements on pages 119 to 
124 includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its exposures to interest rate risk, foreign currency risk, counterparty 
risk, credit risk and liquidity risk.

The Board has a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. 
Accordingly, the financial statements set out on pages 84 to 129 have been prepared on the going concern basis.

AUDITOR
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP have indicated their willingness to continue as Auditor and their reappointment has been approved by the Audit 
Committee. Resolutions to reappoint them and to authorise the Directors to determine their remuneration will be proposed at the 2018 AGM.

AGM
This year’s AGM will be held at the Company’s distribution facility in Coleshill on Thursday, 24 May 2018 at 10.00 am. The notice convening this 
meeting is in a separate document to this Annual Report and Accounts along with the explanatory notes regarding the resolutions that will be 
proposed at the meeting. 

This report was approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by

Sarah Ward 
Company Secretary 

6 March 2018

Company registration number: 460129

77

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Statement of Directors Responsibilities

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulation.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors have prepared the 
Group financial statements and Parent Company financial statements, both in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 
(IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied 
that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and the Company and of the profit or loss of the Group and the Company for 
that period. In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
•  state whether applicable IFRSs have been followed for the Group financial statements and for the Company’s financial statements, subject 

to any material departures disclosed and explained in the financial statements;
•  make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent; and
•  prepare the financial statements on a going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and the Company will  

continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Group and the Company’s 
transactions and such that they disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and the Company. Adequate 
accounting records enable the Directors to ensure that the financial statements and the Directors Remuneration Report comply with the 
Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

The Directors are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website at www.headlam.com. Legislation in the United 
Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

The Directors consider that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group and the Company’s performance, business model and strategy.

Each of the Directors, whose names and functions are listed in the Annual Report and Accounts, confirm that, to the best of their knowledge:

•  the Company’s financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, 

financial position and profit of the Company;

•  the Group financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial 

position and profit of the Group; and

•  the Strategic Report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Group and the 

Company, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that it faces. 

In the case of each Director in office at the date the Corporate Governance Report is approved:

•  so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Auditor is unaware; and
•  they have taken all the steps that they ought to have taken as a Director in order to make themselves aware of any relevant audit information 

and to establish that the Auditor is aware of that information.

78

 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Independent auditors’ report to the members of  
Headlam Group plc

REPORT ON THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Opinion
In our opinion, Headlam Group plc’s Group financial statements and Parent Company financial statements (the “financial statements”):

•  give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and the Parent Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2017 and of the Group’s profit and 

the Group’s and the Parent Company’s cash flows for the year then ended;

•  have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and, as regards the Parent Company’s financial 

statements, as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

•  have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 

4 of the IAS Regulation.

We have audited the financial statements, included within the Annual Report and Accounts (the “Annual Report”), which comprise: the Group 
and Company Statements of Financial Position as at 31 December 2017; the Consolidated Income Statement and Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income, the Group and Company Cash Flow Statements, and the Group and Company Statements of Changes in Equity for the 
year then ended; and the notes to the financial statements, which include a description of the significant accounting policies.

Our opinion is consistent with our reporting to the Audit Committee.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under 
ISAs (UK) are further described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We believe that the 
audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence
We remained independent of the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in 
the UK, which includes the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical 
responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.

To the best of our knowledge and belief, we declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the 
group or the parent company.

Other than those disclosed in note 3 to the financial statements, we have provided no non-audit services to the Group or the Parent Company in 
the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017.

Materiality

Audit scope

Key audit 
matters

OUR AUDIT APPROACH
Overview
•  Overall Group materiality: £2 million (2016: £1.91 million), based on 5% of profit before tax.
•  Overall Parent Company materiality: £1.9 million (2016: £1.8 million), based on 0.8% of total assets.
•  The Group financial statements are a consolidation of a number of reporting companies comprising the 

Group’s operating businesses, centralised functions and non-trading group companies.

•  We performed full scope audits on the financial information of three UK reporting companies: HFD Limited, 

MCD Group Limited and Headlam Group plc (the Company) due to their size and risk characteristics. These UK 
reporting companies comprise 86% of consolidated revenue and 97% of consolidated operating profit.
In addition, limited scope audit procedures were performed on three further reporting companies based in the 
UK, France and Switzerland for group reporting purposes. 

• 

•  Supplier arrangements.
•  Acquisition accounting for Domus – fair value of acquired assets and liabilities

The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements. In 
particular, we looked at where the directors made subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant accounting estimates that 
involved making assumptions and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. 

We gained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework applicable to the Group and the industry in which it operates, and considered 
the risk of acts by the Group which were contrary to applicable laws and regulations, including fraud. We designed audit procedures at group and 
significant component level to respond to the risk, recognising that the risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than 
the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery or intentional 
misrepresentations, or through collusion. We focused on laws and regulations that could give rise to a material misstatement in the Group and 
Parent Company financial statements, including, but not limited to, Companies Act 2006, the Listing Rules, Pensions legislation and UK tax 
legislation. Our tests included, but were not limited to, review of the financial statement disclosures to underlying supporting documentation 
and enquiries of management, component teams and professional advisors. There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures described 
above and the further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and transactions reflected in the financial 
statements, the less likely we would become aware of it.

We did not identify any key audit matters relating to irregularities, including fraud. As in all of our audits we also addressed the risk of 
management override of internal controls, including testing journals and evaluating whether there was evidence of bias by the directors that 
represented a risk of material misstatement due to fraud. 

79

 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Independent auditors’ report to the members of  
Headlam Group plc continued

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial 
statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) 
identified by the auditors, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and 
directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters, and any comments we make on the results of our procedures thereon, were 
addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a 
separate opinion on these matters. This is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit. 

Key audit matter

Supplier arrangements

Refer to the Audit Committee Report on page 56 and the use 
of estimates and judgements in the Accounting Policies on 
page 91.

The Group has a significant number of rebate agreements 
with suppliers. These agreements can contain multiple terms 
or tiered arrangements based on the volume of goods 
purchased. Consequently, the calculation of these rebates 
can be complex and requires accurate inputs and calculations 
to be made. The majority of agreements are co-terminus 
with the financial year, meaning that, although the calculation 
of the rebate does not rely on estimates of future purchases, 
there are significant amounts of rebates receivable subject 
to recovery at the year-end.

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

We tested a sample of rebate balances by requesting 
confirmations from the counterparty.  For those balances 
where no counterparty confirmation was received, we 
recalculated the amount due based on the supporting 
purchase agreements and tested the calculation inputs 
back to underlying financial records.  No material 
inconsistencies or exceptions were noted.

For those balances subject to testing, we agreed all post 
year end settlements back to evidence of cash receipt or 
credit notes received, to provide comfort over the 
recoverability of the balances.

 In addition, in order to assess management’s ability to 
accurately calculate rebate receivable balances, we 
compared cash receipts received during the year against 
balances accrued at the previous year end. No material 
inconsistencies or exceptions were noted.

Acquisition accounting for Domus– fair value of 
acquired assets and liabilities

Refer to the Audit Committee Report on page 56 and the use 
of estimates and judgements in the Accounting Policies on 
page 91.

On 7 December 2017, Headlam Group plc acquired 100% of 
the share capital of Domus Group Limited and its subsidiary 
entities for consideration of £29.1m.

Headlam Group plc has also made two smaller acquisitions 
during the year, but we have focused our work on the largest 
acquisition due to its relative size and significance to the 
Group as a whole and the relative immateriality of the other 
acquisitions.

We focused our work on this area as the accounting for the 
acquisition is inherently judgmental as it requires the 
directors to exercise judgement and use estimates in order 
to value consideration, identify and value intangible assets, 
and assess the fair value of other assets and liabilities, as well 
as the calculation of associated goodwill.

We read the sale and purchase agreement in order to 
understand the nature of the transaction and ensure that 
relevant clauses that impact the accounting had been 
considered by the directors.
We tested the fair values ascribed to intangible assets by 
understanding the assumptions adopted in the valuation 
model, which include the forecast attrition rate in relation to 
existing customers, the expected longevity of the 
customer relationships, royalty revenue rates and the 
financial forecasts. We evaluated the assumptions, utilising 
the work of valuation experts where appropriate, and 
confirmed that the directors have adopted reasonable 
assumptions in each circumstance.
For the remaining fair values of other assets and liabilities, 
we evaluated the assessment and calculation of material 
assets and provisions to check that they are accurate and 
reflect information that was known in relation to events that 
existed at the transaction date.
We reviewed the basis of the deferred and contingent 
consideration and verified the expected future 
performance to the directors’ forecasts and the underlying 
agreements to conclude that the basis of recognition was 
reasonable.
We consider the directors’ assessment of the provisional 
fair value of the opening balance sheet to be supportable.

We determined that there were no key audit matters applicable to the parent company to communicate in our report.

How we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial statements as a whole, 
taking into account the structure of the Group and the Parent Company, the accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which they 
operate.

The Group operates as a supplier and distributor of floorcovering products and has two operating segments; the UK and Continental Europe. 

80

 
   
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

The Group financial statements are a consolidation of a number of reporting companies, comprising the group’s operating businesses, 
centralised functions and non-trading group companies.

In establishing the overall approach to the group audit, we identified three UK reporting companies which, in our view, required an audit of their 
complete financial information both due to their size and risk characteristics: HFD Limited, MCD Limited and Headlam Group plc (the Company). 
These reporting companies were audited by the group engagement team. We also conducted a limited scope audit over three insignificant 
reporting companies, based in France, Switzerland and the UK. The France and Switzerland limited scope audits were conducted by a PwC 
network firm in their respective countries as component auditors, and in the UK was performed by Grant Thornton UK LLP as component 
auditors. 

In addition to the written instructions issued to the component auditors, the Group audit team were in contact with them at each stage of the 
audit. The Group team discussed in detail with the component auditors the planned audit approach for the work performed including the areas 
of focus that were relevant to their work, were in attendance at local audit closing meetings and discussed and evaluated the detailed findings 
from this work. 

The work at these six companies, together with additional procedures performed at the Group level, including analytical procedures and specific 
testing of the consolidation, gave us the evidence we needed for our opinion on the Group financial statements as a whole.

Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality. These, together 
with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent of our audit procedures on the 
individual financial statement line items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the 
financial statements as a whole. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Overall materiality

How we determined it

Rationale for benchmark applied

Group financial statements

Parent Company financial statements

£2 million (2016: £1.91 million).

£1.9 million (2016: £1.8 million).

5% of profit before tax.

0.8% of total assets.

We believe that profit before tax is the 
primary measure used by the 
shareholders in assessing the 
performance of the Group, and is a 
generally accepted auditing benchmark.

We believe that total assets is the primary 
measure used by the shareholders in 
assessing the performance of the Parent 
Company, and is a generally accepted 
auditing benchmark.

For each component in the scope of our group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall group materiality. The range of 
materiality allocated across components was between £112,000 and £1,900,000. Certain components were audited to a local statutory audit 
materiality that was also less than our overall group materiality.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit above £100,000 (Group audit) 
(2016: £65,000) and £100,000 (Parent Company audit) (2016: £65,000) as well as misstatements below those amounts that, in our view, 
warranted reporting for qualitative reasons.

Going concern
In accordance with ISAs (UK) we report as follows:

Reporting obligation

Outcome

We are required to report if we have anything material to add or draw 
attention to in respect of the directors’ statement in the financial 
statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate 
to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the 
financial statements and the directors’ identification of any material 
uncertainties to the group’s and the parent company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern over a period of at least twelve months 
from the date of approval of the financial statements.

We are required to report if the directors’ statement relating to 
Going Concern in accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.6R(3) is materially 
inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit.

We have nothing material to add or to draw attention to. However, 
because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this 
statement is not a guarantee as to the Group’s and Parent 
Company’s ability to continue as a going concern.

We have nothing to report.

81

 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Independent auditors’ report to the members of  
Headlam Group plc continued

Reporting on other information 
The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the financial statements and our auditors’ report 
thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information 
and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, any form of assurance 
thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the 
other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to be 
materially misstated. If we identify an apparent material inconsistency or material misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to 
conclude whether there is a material misstatement of the financial statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on 
the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We 
have nothing to report based on these responsibilities.

With respect to the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report, we also considered whether the disclosures required by the UK Companies Act 2006 
have been included. 

Based on the responsibilities described above and our work undertaken in the course of the audit, the Companies Act 2006, (CA06), ISAs (UK) 
and the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) require us also to report certain opinions and matters as described below 
(required by ISAs (UK) unless otherwise stated).

Strategic Report and Directors’ Report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information given in the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report for 
the year ended 31 December 2017 is consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared in accordance with applicable legal 
requirements. (CA06)

In light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and parent company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we did 
not identify any material misstatements in the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report. (CA06)

The directors’ assessment of the prospects of the group and of the principal risks that would threaten the solvency or liquidity of the Group
We have nothing material to add or draw attention to regarding:

•  The directors’ confirmation on page 26 of the Annual Report that they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the 

group, including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity.

•  The disclosures in the Annual Report that describe those risks and explain how they are being managed or mitigated.
•  The directors’ explanation on page 27 of the Annual Report as to how they have assessed the prospects of the Group, over what period they 
have done so and why they consider that period to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation 
that the group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of their assessment, including any 
related disclosures drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.

We have nothing to report having performed a review of the directors’ statement that they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal 
risks facing the group and statement in relation to the longer-term viability of the Group. Our review was substantially less in scope than an audit 
and only consisted of making inquiries and considering the directors’ process supporting their statements; checking that the statements are in 
alignment with the relevant provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the “Code”); and considering whether the statements are 
consistent with the knowledge and understanding of the group and parent company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit. 
(Listing Rules).

Other Code Provisions
We have nothing to report in respect of our responsibility to report when: 

•  The statement given by the directors, on page 58, that they consider the Annual Report taken as a whole to be fair, balanced and 

understandable, and provides the information necessary for the members to assess the group’s and parent company’s position and 
performance, business model and strategy is materially inconsistent with our knowledge of the group and parent company obtained in the 
course of performing our audit.

•  The section of the Annual Report on page 56 describing the work of the Audit Committee does not appropriately address matters 

communicated by us to the Audit Committee.

•  The directors’ statement relating to the parent company’s compliance with the Code does not properly disclose a departure from a relevant 

provision of the Code specified, under the Listing Rules, for review by the auditors.

•  Directors Remuneration

In our opinion, the part of the Directors Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 
2006. (CA06)

82

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND THE AUDIT
Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities set out on page 78, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the 
financial statements in accordance with the applicable framework and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. The directors are also 
responsible for such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the Parent Company’s ability to continue as a 
going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors 
either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is 
not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements 
can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the 
economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditors’ report.

Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the parent company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 of 
Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any other 
purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent 
in writing.

OTHER REQUIRED REPORTING
Companies Act 2006 exception reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 

branches not visited by us; or

•  certain disclosures of Directors remuneration specified by law are not made; or
•  the parent company financial statements and the part of the Directors Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the 

accounting records and returns. 

We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility. 

Appointment
Following the recommendation of the Audit Committee, we were appointed by the members on 20 May 2016 to audit the financial statements 
for the year ended 31 December 2016 and subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is 2 years, covering the 
years ended 31 December 2016 to 31 December 2017.

Mark Smith 
(Senior Statutory Auditor)

for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
Birmingham

6 March 2018

83

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Consolidated Income Statement
for the year ended 31 December 2017

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit

Distribution costs
Administrative expenses

Operating profit
Finance income
Finance expenses

Net finance costs

Profit before tax
Taxation

Profit for the year attributable to the equity 

shareholders

Earnings per share
Basic

Diluted

Ordinary dividend per share
Interim dividend proposed for the financial year

Final dividend proposed for the financial year

Special dividend proposed for the financial year

Underlying
2017
£000

Non-underlying
2017
£000

Total
2017
£000

Underlying
2016
£000

Non-underlying
2016
£000

707,764
(487,683)

220,081

(130,476)
(45,822)

43,783
578
(1,243)

(665)

43,118
(7,976)

–
–

–

707,764
(487,683)

693,572
(481,068)

220,081

212,504

–
(2,399)

(2,399)
–
–

–

(2,399)
179

(130,476)
(48,221)

(127,982)
(43,450)

41,384
578
(1,243)

(665)

40,719
(7,797)

41,072
756
(1,722)

(966)

40,106
(7,601)

–
–

–

–
(1,927)

(1,927)
–
–

–

(1,927)
385

Total
2016
£000

693,572
(481,068)

212,504

(127,982)
(45,377)

39,145
756
(1,722)

(966)

38,179
(7,216)

35,142

(2,220)

32,922

32,505

(1,542)

30,963

41.7p

41.5p

39.1p

38.9p

38.7p

38.5p

7.55p

17.25p

–

36.8p

36.6p

6.70p

15.85p

8.00p

Note

2

 3

2
6
6

3
7

9

9

22

22

22

All Group operations during the financial years were continuing operations.

84

 
 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
for the year ended 31 December 2017

Profit for the year attributable to the equity shareholders
Other comprehensive income:

Items that will never be reclassified to profit or loss

  Remeasurement of defined benefit plans
  Related tax

Impact of change in UK tax rates on deferred tax

Items that are or may be reclassified to profit or loss

  Foreign exchange translation differences arising on translation of overseas operations
  Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedges
  Transfers to profit or loss on cash flow hedges
  Related tax

Impact of change in UK tax rates on deferred tax

Other comprehensive income/(expense) for the year

Total comprehensive income attributable to the equity shareholders for the year

Note

20

2017 
£000

2016 
£000

32,922

30,963

9,127
(1,729)
–

7,398

(277)
(154)
(77)
43
–

(465)

6,933

39,855

(4,336)
961
(183)

(3,558)

1,707
572
175
(148)
(3)

2,303

(1,255)

29,708

85

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Statements of Financial Position
at 31 December 2017

Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investment properties
Intangible assets
Investments in subsidiary undertakings
Deferred tax assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Liabilities
Current liabilities
Bank overdraft
Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings
Trade and other payables
Employee benefits
Income tax payable

Non-current liabilities
Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Deferred tax liabilities
Employee benefits

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent
Share capital
Share premium
Other reserves
Retained earnings

Total equity

 Group 

2017
£000

2016
£000

Company

2017
£000

2016
£000

Note

10
10
11
12
13

14
15
16

16
17
18
20
8

17
18
19
13
20

22

22

101,631
–
44,662
–
648

146,941

131,566
127,976
42,030

301,572

448,513

102,934
–
10,388
–
1,138

114,460

126,037
128,934
59,343

314,314

428,774

2
83,143
–
120,640
–

203,785

–
21,320
16,646

37,966

36
84,835
–
90,707
–

175,578

–
17,351
28,171

45,522

241,751

221,100

–
(233)
(190,299)
(2,235)
(6,339)

(4)
(224)
(183,304)
(2,169)
(6,824)

–
–
(41,780)
(2,235)
(1,329)

(199,106)

(192,525)

(45,344)

(6,519)
(4,938)
(2,048)
(6,847)
(10,481)

(6,493)
–
(1,531)
(4,077)
(20,781)

(30,833)

(32,882)

(229,939)

(225,407)

–
(4,938)
–
(4,438)
(7,513)

(16,889)

(62,233)

–
–
(38,143)
(2,169)
(2,147)

(42,459)

–
–
–
(3,239)
(16,113)

(19,352)

(61,811)

218,574

203,367

179,518

159,289

4,268
53,512
2,891
157,903

218,574

4,268
53,512
2,272
143,315

203,367

4,268
53,512
16,610
105,128

179,518

4,268
53,512
15,714
85,795

159,289

The notes on pages 90 to 129 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

The Company is taking advantage of the exemption in s408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its individual income statement, however 
the profit for the year attributable to the equity shareholders is £38,981,000.

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 6 March 2018 and were signed on its behalf by

Steve Wilson 
Director 

Chris Payne
Director

Company Number: 460129

86

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Statement of Changes in Equity – Group
for the year ended 31 December 2017

Share
capital
£000

4,268

Share
premium
£000

53,512

Capital
redemption
reserve
£000

Translation
reserve
£000

Cash flow
hedging
reserve
£000

Treasury
reserve
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
equity
£000

88

5,429

(516)

(5,276)

137,603

195,108

Balance at 1 January 2016
Profit for the year attributable to the  
equity shareholders
Other comprehensive income/(expense)

Total comprehensive income/(expense) 
for the year

Transactions with equity shareholders, 
recorded directly in equity
Share-based payments
Share options exercised by employees
Consideration for purchase of own shares
Current tax on share options
Deferred tax on share options
Dividends to equity holders

Total contributions by and distributions to 
equity shareholders

Balance at 31 December 2016

Balance at 1 January 2017
Profit for the year attributable to the  
equity shareholders
Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income/(expense) 
for the year

Transactions with equity shareholders, 
recorded directly in equity
Share-based payments
Share options exercised by employees
Consideration for purchase of own shares
Current tax on share options
Deferred tax on share options
Dividends to equity holders

Total contributions by and distributions to 
equity shareholders

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

4,268

4,268

53,512

53,512

88

88

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

Balance at 31 December 2017

4,268

53,512

88

6,859

–
1,707

1,707

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

7,136

7,136

–
(277)

–
747

747

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

231

231

–
(231)

(277)

(231)

–
–

–

30,963
(3,709)

30,963
(1,255)

27,254

29,708

–
740
(647)
–
–
–

1,239
(317)
–
21
(21)
(22,464)

1,239
423
(647)
21
(21)
(22,464)

93

(21,542)

(21,449)

(5,183)

143,315

203,367

(5,183)

143,315

203,367

–
–

–

32,922
7,441

32,922
6,933

40,363

39,855

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–

–
2,307
(1,180)
–
–
–

1,218
(1,504)
–
102
138
(25,729)

1,218
803
(1,180)
102
138
(25,729)

1,127

(25,775)

(24,648)

(4,056)

157,903

218,574

87

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Statement of Changes in Equity – Company
for the year ended 31 December 2017

Share
capital
£000

4,268

Share
premium
£000

53,512

Capital
redemption
reserve
£000

Special
reserve
£000

Cash flow
hedging
reserve
£000

Treasury
reserve
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
equity
£000

88

20,578

(516)

(5,276)

76,455

149,109

–
747

747

–
–
–
–
–

–

231

231

–
(231)

(231)

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

34,008
(3,128)

34,008
(2,381)

30,880

31,627

–
740
(647)
–
–

1,239
(317)
–
2
(22,464)

1,239
423
(647)
2
(22,464)

93

(21,540)

(21,447)

(5,183)

85,795

159,289

(5,183)

85,795

159,289

–
–

–

38,981
6,312

38,981
6,081

45,293

45,062

–
2,307
(1,180)
–
–
–

1,218
(1,504)
–
19
36
(25,729)

1,218
803
(1,180)
19
36
(25,729)

1,127

(25,960)

(24,833)

(4,056)

105,128

179,518

Balance at 1 January 2016
Profit for the year attributable to the  
equity shareholders
Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income/(expense) 
for the year

Transactions with equity shareholders, 
recorded directly in equity
Share-based payments
Share options exercised by employees
Consideration for purchase of own shares
Deferred tax on share options
Dividends to equity holders

Total contributions by and distributions to 
equity shareholders

Balance at 31 December 2016

Balance at 1 January 2017
Profit for the year attributable to the  
equity shareholders
Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income/(expense) 
for the year

Transactions with equity shareholders, 
recorded directly in equity
Share-based payments
Share options exercised by employees
Consideration for purchase of own shares
Current tax on share options
Deferred tax on share options
Dividends to equity holders

Total contributions by and distributions to 
equity shareholders

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

4,268

4,268

53,512

53,512

88

88

20,578

20,578

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

Balance at 31 December 2017

4,268

53,512

88

20,578

88

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Cash Flow Statements
for the year ended 31 December 2017

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax for the year
Adjustments for:
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment
Finance income
Finance expense
(Profit)/loss on sale of property, plant and equipment
Share-based payments

Operating cash flows before changes in working capital  
and other payables
Change in inventories
Change in trade and other receivables
Change in trade and other payables

Cash generated from the operations
Interest paid
Tax paid
Additional contributions to defined benefit plan

Net cash flow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
Interest received
Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired
Repayment of acquired borrowings on acquisition
Acquisition of property, plant and equipment

Net cash flow from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from the issue of treasury shares
Payment to acquire own shares
Drawdown of borrowings
Repayment of borrowings
Dividends paid

Net cash flow from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January
Effect of exchange rate fluctuations on cash held

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December

Group

2017
£000

2016
£000

Company

2017
£000

2016
£000

40,719

38,179

38,706

33,732

5,845
(578)
1,243
(45)
1,218

48,402
(2,210)
7,564
754

54,510
(761)
(8,388)
(2,164)

43,197

190
576
(24,763)
(7,042)
(3,058)

(34,097)

803
(1,180)
25,000
(25,230)
(25,729)

(26,336)

(17,236)
59,339
(73)

42,030

5,276
(756)
1,722
(15)
1,239

45,645
(5,895)
(6,467)
10,365

43,648
(1,133)
(7,703)
(2,171)

32,641

401
752
–
–
(2,963)

(1,810)

423
(647)
6,456
(20,000)
(22,464)

(36,232)

(5,401)
63,932
808

59,339

1,697
(496)
747
–
403

41,057
–
(338)
364

41,083
(246)
(229)
(2,164)

38,444

29
288
(24,180)
–
–

(23,863)

803
(1,180)
25,000
(25,000)
(25,729)

(26,106)

(11,525)
28,171
–

16,646

1,718
(763)
1,178
5
338

36,208
–
(782)
5,062

40,488
(565)
(339)
(2,171)

37,413

327
400
–
–
(282)

445

423
(647)
–
(20,000)
(22,464)

(42,688)

(4,830)
33,001
–

28,171

Note

6
6

21

20

24

10

22

16

89

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES
Reporting entity
Headlam Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a company incorporated and domiciled in the UK. The address of its registered office is PO Box 1,  
Gorsey Lane, Coleshill, Birmingham, B46 1LW.

Statement of compliance
Both the Company’s and the Group’s financial statements have been prepared and approved by the Directors in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the EU (‘adopted IFRSs’). On publishing the Company’s financial statements here together with the 
Group financial statements, the Company is taking advantage of the exemption in s408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its individual 
income statement and related notes that form a part of these approved financial statements.

The Company and Group financial statements were authorised for issuance on 6 March 2018.

Basis of preparation
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the financial statements of the Company and the financial statements of the 
Group are set out below. These policies have been applied consistently to all years presented, unless otherwise stated.

Judgements made by the Directors, in the application of these accounting policies that have significant effect on the financial statements and 
estimates with a significant risk of material adjustment in the next year, are discussed below.

(a) Measurement convention
These financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the Company’s functional currency. All financial information presented in 
pounds sterling has been rounded to the nearest thousand.

The Company and Group financial statements are prepared on the historical cost basis with the exception of derivative financial instruments and 
pension scheme assets and liabilities, both of which are stated at fair value.

The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis. In determining the appropriate basis of preparation of the financial 
statements the Directors are required to consider whether the Group can continue in operational existence for a period no shorter than 12 
months from the date of approval of the annual report.

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out in the 
Chairman’s Statement on page 9 and Chief Executive’s Review on pages 10 and 11. 

The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the Finance Review on pages 12 to 
17. In addition, note 23 to the financial statements includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial 
risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk.

The Group meets its day-to-day working capital requirements through its banking facilities. As highlighted in note 17 to the Financial 
Statements, the Group completed a refinancing to increase its existing facilities, this was to maintain sufficient headroom throughout the year 
whilst allowing funds for the Groups acquisition and investment initiatives. The Group has maintained two separate agreements with Barclays 
Bank PLC and HSBC Bank Plc and these include both Sterling and Euro term facilities. The Group’s additional funding, increase the level of 
Sterling committed facilities from £47.5 million to £72.5 million, alongside its Euro facilities of €8.6 million. The Group also has short term 
uncommitted facilities which continue at £25 million, and are renewable on an annual basis. 

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for a period no shorter 
than 12 months from the date of approval of the annual report. Thus they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing 
the annual financial statements.

b) Use of accounting estimates and judgements
Estimates
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with adopted IFRSs requires the use of estimates and assumptions that affect the 
reported amounts of assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during 
the reporting year. Although these estimates are based on management’s best knowledge of the amount, events or actions, actual results 
ultimately may differ from those estimates.

The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in 
which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both 
current and future periods.

The key sources of estimation uncertainty at the Statement of Financial Position date that may give rise to a material adjustment to the carrying 
value of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are as follows:

•  Taxation

Provision is made for any uncertain tax positions that the Group may be exposed to at the Statement of Financial Position date.

  Deferred tax assets are recognised at the Statement of Financial Position date based on the assumption that there is a high expectation that 
the asset will be realised in due course. This assumption is dependent on the Group’s ability to generate sufficient future taxable profits.

90

 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
•  Inventory

Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is the invoiced cost of materials less any supplier discounts received 
and overheads incurred in bringing inventory to its present condition and location. This includes management’s best estimates of overheads 
to be absorbed into the cost of inventory and discounts likely to be received from suppliers.
Provision is calculated based on the ageing profile and consideration of inventory sold for less than its carrying value.

•  Employee benefits

The deficit relating to the Group’s defined benefit plans is assessed annually in accordance with IAS 19 and after taking independent actuarial 
advice. The principal assumptions are set out in note 20. The amount of the deficit is dependent on plan asset and liability values and the 
actuarial assumptions used to determine the deficit. 
The assumptions include asset growth rates, pension and salary increases, price inflation, discount rate used to measure actuarial liabilities 
and mortality rates.
•  Supplier arrangements

The group has a number of rebate agreements with suppliers. These agreements can contain multiple terms or tiered arrangements based 
on the volume of goods purchased. Consequently, the calculation of these rebates can be complex and requires accurate inputs and 
calculations to be made. The majority of agreements are co-terminus with the financial year, meaning that, although the calculation of the 
rebate does not rely on estimates of future purchases, there are significant amounts of rebates receivable subject to recovery at the 
year-end.

•  Acquisition accounting

IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ requires that the consideration for an acquisition is recorded at fair value. Where contingent consideration is 
part of the acquisition cost then management have estimated the fair value of the amount payable. Contingent consideration is revalued 
each reporting period according to the latest forecasts of the acquired business based on the terms of the earn-out arrangement. Where 
deferred consideration is part of the acquisition cost then it is recorded, discounted back to the present value and held on the balance sheet.

Judgements
Judgements made by the Directors, in the application of these accounting policies that have significant effect on the financial statements  
have been:

•  Acquisition accounting
  Assets and liabilities must also be recognised at fair value on acquisition. The identification and measurement of contingent liabilities and 

intangible assets are key areas of judgement. 
The Group acquired Domus Group of Companies Limited during the year. As part of the acquisition the Group has performed a purchase 
price allocation review and has assessed the fair value of the assets acquired. Using valuations experts and assumptions regarding the 
performance of the acquired entities management have identified additional intangibles relating to brand names, customer relationships and 
order book which have been recognised and either defined as indefinite lived or amortised over their expected useful economic life. Key 
assumptions in valuing the intangibles were royalty rates, discount rates, and future cash flows which have been assessed by the directors 
and where appropriate bench marked against the market. Any excess of the purchase consideration over the estimated fair values of 
acquired net identified assets is recorded as goodwill in the balance sheet and is allocated to an appropriate business segment. Any changes 
in the underlying assumptions or life of the determined assets would alter the goodwill and amortisation charges included within the financial 
statements. More details on the Domus Group of Companies Limited are set out in note 24. 

(c) Impact of newly adopted accounting standards
There have been no significant changes in accounting policies or any material impact on the Group financial statements arising from the 
adoption of new accounting standards and interpretations in 2017.

(d) IFRS not yet applied
The following standards and interpretations, which were not effective as at 31 December 2017 and have not been early adopted by the Group, 
will be adopted in future accounting periods:

• 
• 

International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 9 ‘Financial instruments’ (effective 1 January 2018, replacing IAS 39).
International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 15 ‘Revenue from contracts with customers’ (effective  
1 January 2018, replacing IAS 18 and IAS 11).
• 
International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 16 ‘Leases’ (effective 1 January 2019, replacing IAS 17).
•  Clarification of Acceptable Methods of Depreciation and Amortisation – Amendments to IAS 16 and IAS 38.
•  Equity Method in Separate Financial Statements – Amendments to IAS 27.
•  Disclosure Initiative – Amendments to IAS 1.
•  Annual Improvements to IFRSs – 2012–2014 Cycle. 

Whilst some of the standards above are not expected to have an impact on the Group the ones discussed further below will potentially have  
an impact.

IFRS 9 – Financial Instruments 
This introduces new rules for hedge accounting and a new impairment model for financial assets, it also addresses the classification, 
measurement and de-recognition of financial assets and liabilities. 
A detailed assessment of the impact of the new standard is currently underway. It is currently not possible to quantify the impact of the new 
standard but it is not expected to be significant.

91

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers
This standard uses a five-step model to be applied to all sales contracts. The key principle of the standard is that revenue is recognised when 
control of the goods or services passes to customers at an amount that reflects the consideration to which an entity expects to be entitled in 
exchange for those goods or services.

A detailed assessment of the impact of the new standard is currently ongoing and initial findings are that there wouldn’t be a significant impact 
on revenue for the Group.

IFRS 16 – Leases
This new standard eliminates the classification of leases over 12 months in length as either operating or finance leases and introduces a single 
lessee accounting model whereby all leases are accounted for as finance leases, unless of low-value. The standard will therefore require that the 
Group’s leased assets are recorded within property, plant and equipment as ‘right of use assets’ with a corresponding lease liability which is based 
on the discounted value of the cash payments required under each lease. The income statement will be affected by the replacement of the 
operating lease expense with a depreciation charge and a financing expense.

The Standard is effective for periods beginning after 1 January 2019 and it will therefore be effective in the consolidated financial statements for 
the Group for 31 December 2019. The Group has collated information on leases held at the 31 December 2017 for an evaluation of the impact of 
IFRS 16 and this work is still being assessed. 

Basis of consolidation
The Group financial statements consolidate those of the Company and its subsidiaries which together are referred to as the ‘Group’.  
The Company’s financial statements present information about the Company as a separate entity and not about its Group.

Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. Control exists when the Group has power over an entity, is exposed or has rights to variable 
returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. In assessing control, 
potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or convertible are taken into account.

The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the Group’s financial statements from the date that control commences until the date 
that control ceases. 

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries by the Group. 

Inter-company transactions, balances and unrealised gains and losses on transactions between Group companies are eliminated in the Group’s 
financial statements.

Foreign currency
Foreign currency transactions
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the foreign exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies at the Statement of Financial Position date are translated at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date. 
Foreign exchange differences arising on translation are recognised in the income statement. Non-monetary assets and liabilities that are 
measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange rate at the date of the transaction.

Financial statements of foreign operations
The assets and liabilities of foreign subsidiaries are translated at foreign exchange rates ruling at the Statement of Financial Position date. 

The revenues, expenses and cash flows of foreign subsidiaries are translated at an average rate for the period where this rate approximates to 
the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions.

Exchange differences arising from this translation of foreign subsidiaries are taken directly to the translation reserve and reflected as a 
movement in the statement of comprehensive income.

In respect of all foreign operations, any differences that have arisen after 1 January 2004, the date of transition to IFRS, are presented as a 
separate component of equity.

Foreign currency exposure
Note 23 contains information about the foreign currency exposure of the Group and risks in relation to foreign exchange movements.

Derivative financial instruments
The Group holds derivative financial instruments to hedge its foreign currency and its interest rate risk exposures. Derivatives are recognised 
initially at fair value; attributable transaction costs are recognised in the income statement when incurred. Subsequent to initial recognition, 
derivatives are measured at fair value, and changes therein are accounted for as described below. The fair value of interest rate swaps is based  
on third-party valuations. Those quotes are tested for reasonableness by discounting estimated future cash flows based on the terms and 
maturity of each contract and using market interest rates for a similar instrument at the measurement date.

The fair value of forward exchange contracts is their market price at the Statement of Financial Position date, being the present value of  
the forward price. The gain or loss on remeasurement to fair value of forward exchange contracts is recognised immediately in the  
income statement. 

92

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
The fair value of diesel fuel price swaps is based on third party valuations. Those quotes are tested for reasonableness by discounting estimated 
future cash flows based on the terms and maturity of each contract.

Cash flow hedges
Changes in the fair value of the derivative hedging instrument designated as a cash flow hedge are recognised directly in equity to the extent 
that the hedge is effective. To the extent that the hedge is ineffective, changes in fair value are recognised in the income statement. If the 
hedging instrument no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, then hedge accounting is 
discontinued prospectively. The cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in equity remains there until the forecast transaction occurs. 
When the hedged item is a non-financial asset, the amount recognised in equity is transferred to the carrying amount of the asset when it is 
recognised. In other cases the amount recognised in equity is transferred to the income statement in the same period that the hedged item 
affects profit or loss. 

The Group enters into forward diesel swaps in order to hedge exposures to commodity price risk. Cash flow hedging is applied in respect of these 
instruments in order to reduce volatility in the income statement.

The Group held interest rate swaps to manage the risk of movements in interest rates. Cash flow hedging is applied to reduce volatility in the 
income statement. Existing interest rate swaps expired during the financial year and were not renewed.

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The cost of self-constructed assets 
includes the cost of materials, direct labour and any other costs directly attributable to bringing the asset to a working condition for its intended 
use. Self-constructed assets begin to be depreciated from the date they become available for use.

Where parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for as separate items of property, plant 
and equipment.

Depreciation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis in order to depreciate assets to their residual value over their useful 
economic lives. The annual rates applicable are:

Freehold and long leasehold properties 
Short leasehold properties 
Motor vehicles 
Office and computer equipment 
Warehouse and production equipment 

– 2%
– period of lease
– 25%
– 10%–33.3%
– 10%–20%

Land is not depreciated.

The residual balances are reviewed annually.

Gains and losses on disposal of an item of property, plant and equipment are determined by comparing the proceeds from disposal with the 
carrying amount of property, plant and equipment and are recognised in the income statement.

Investment properties
Investment properties are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses.

Depreciation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis in order to depreciate assets to their residual value over their useful 
economic lives. The annual rate applicable is:

Freehold and long leasehold properties 

– 2%

The residual balances are reviewed annually.

Goodwill and other intangible assets
Goodwill
All business combinations are accounted for by applying the purchase method. Goodwill represents amounts arising on acquisition of 
subsidiaries. In respect of business acquisitions that have occurred since 1 January 2004, goodwill represents the difference between the cost of 
the acquisition and the fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired.

Following the requirements of IFRS 3 revised, transaction costs associated with acquisitions and movements in contingent consideration are 
recognised in the income statement.

Goodwill is stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units and is not amortised but 
tested annually for impairment, or more frequently when there is an indicator that the unit may be impaired.

In respect of acquisitions prior to 1 January 2004, goodwill is included on the basis of its deemed cost, which represents the amount recorded 
under UK GAAP which was broadly comparable save that only separable intangibles were recognised and goodwill was amortised. This is in 
accordance with IFRS 1.

93

 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
Other intangibles
Other intangible assets that are acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Intangible 
assets recognised as a result of a business combination are stated at fair value at the date of acquisition less cumulative amortisation and 
impairment losses.

Amortisation
Amortisation is charged to the income statement and is split over the estimated useful lives of each separately identifiable intangible asset 
unless such lives are indefinite. Amortisation occurs on brand names, order book and customer relationships and is charged to administrative 
expenses in the income statement. The estimated useful lives are assessed to be:

Brand names 

– 10 – 15 years

Order book – one month 

– 36 months

Customer relationships 

– 5 – 10 years

Intangible assets with an indefinite useful life and goodwill are systematically tested for impairment at each Statement of Financial Position date. 
Other intangible assets are amortised from the date they are available for use. 

Trade and other receivables 
Trade and other receivables are initially stated at fair value and subsequently at amortised cost less impairment losses. Debts are provided for, 
the credit loss allowance, on specific receivables in full as soon as they are known to be ‘bad’ or it becomes apparent that payment is ‘doubtful’.

Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is based on the first-in first-out principle and includes expenditure 
incurred in acquiring the inventories and bringing them to their existing location and condition. Net realisable value represents the estimated 
selling price less all estimated costs of completion and costs to be incurred in marketing, selling and distribution. 

Allowances for inventory losses are determined by reference to each individual product and are calculated by assessing the age and quantity  
of each individual product.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents are carried in the Statement of Financial Position at amortised cost.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances and call deposits. Bank overdrafts that are repayable on demand and form an integral part  
of cash management of both the Company and Group are included as a component of cash and cash equivalents for the purpose only of the 
Cash Flow Statement.

Impairment
The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets, other than inventories and deferred tax assets, are reviewed at each Statement of Financial 
Position date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, the asset’s recoverable amount  
is estimated.

The recoverable amount for goodwill is estimated at each Statement of Financial Position date.

For the purposes of impairment testing, assets are grouped together into the smallest group of assets that generates cash flows from 
continuing use that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other groups of assets.

An impairment loss is recognised whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating unit exceeds its recoverable amount.

Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement.

Impairment losses recognised in respect of cash-generating units are allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to 
cash-generating units and then to reduce the carrying amount of the other assets in the unit on a pro rata basis. 

Calculation of recoverable amount
The recoverable amount of assets, with the exception of the Group’s receivables, is the greater of their fair value less cost to sell and value in use. 
In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current 
market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. For an asset that does not generate largely independent cash 
inflows, the recoverable amount is determined for the cash-generating unit to which the asset belongs.

The recoverable amount of the Group’s receivables carried at amortised cost is calculated as the present value of estimated future cash flows, 
discounted at the original effective interest rate, i.e. the effective interest rate computed at initial recognition of these financial assets. 
Receivables with a short duration are not discounted.

94

 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
Reversals of impairment
An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed.

In respect of other assets, an impairment loss is reversed when there is an indication that the impairment loss may no longer exist and there had 
been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount.

An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been 
determined, net of depreciation or amortisation, if no impairment loss had been recognised. 

Trade payables
Trade payables are initially recognised at fair value and then are stated at amortised cost.

Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, interest-
bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost with any difference between cost and redemption value being recognised in the income 
statement over the period of the borrowings on an effective interest basis.

Borrowing costs
Borrowing costs are capitalised where the Group constructs qualifying assets. All other borrowing costs are written off to the income statement 
as incurred.

Borrowing costs are charged to the income statement using the effective interest rate method.

Provisions
Provisions are recognised in accordance with IAS 37 ‘Provisions, Contingent Assets and Contingent Liabilities’. Provisions are made for property 
dilapidations where a legal obligation exists and when the decision has been made to exit a property, or where the end of the lease commitment 
is imminent and a reliable estimate of the exit liability can be made.

Employee benefits
The Company and the Group operate both defined benefit and defined contribution plans, the assets of which are held in independent 
trustee-administered funds. The pension cost is assessed in accordance with the advice of a qualified actuary.

Defined contribution plans
Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans are recognised as an expense in the income statement as incurred.

Defined benefit plans
The Group’s net obligation in respect of defined benefit pension plans is calculated by estimating the amount of future benefit that employees 
have earned in return for their service in the current and prior periods. That benefit is discounted to determine its present value, and the fair 
value of any plan assets is deducted. The liability discount rate is the yield at the Statement of Financial Position date using AA rated corporate 
bonds that have maturity dates approximating to the terms of the Group’s obligations. The calculation is performed by a qualified actuary using 
the projected unit credit method.

When the benefits of a plan are improved, the portion of the increased benefit relating to past service by employees is recognised as an expense 
in the income statement immediately. 

To the extent that any benefits vest immediately, the expense is recognised directly in the income statement.

All actuarial gains and losses that arise in calculating the Group’s obligation in respect of a scheme are recognised immediately in reserves and 
reported in the statement of comprehensive income.

Where the calculation results in a benefit to the Group, the asset recognised is limited to the present value of any future refunds from the plan or 
reductions in future contributions to the plan.

The Group operates a UK defined benefit pension plan and a defined benefit plan in Switzerland. In the UK, there is no contractual agreement or 
stated Group policy for allocating the net defined benefit liability between the participating subsidiaries, and as such, the full deficit is recognised 
by the Company, which is the sponsoring employer. 

The participating subsidiary companies have recognised a cost equal to contributions payable for the period as advised by a professionally 
qualified actuary.

95

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
Share-based payment transactions
The Company and Group operate various equity-settled share option schemes under the approved and unapproved executive schemes and 
savings-related schemes.

For executive share option schemes, the option price may not be less than the mid-market value of the Group’s shares at the time when the 
options were granted or the nominal value.

Further details of the share plans are given in the Remuneration Report on pages 60 to 73.

The fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding increase in equity over the period that the 
employees unconditionally become entitled to the award. The fair value is measured at grant date and spread over the period during which the 
employees become unconditionally entitled to the options. The fair value of the options granted is measured using an option valuation model, 
taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The amount recognised as an expense is adjusted to reflect 
the actual number of share options that vest except where forfeiture is due only to market conditions such as share prices not achieving the 
threshold for vesting.

When options are granted to employees of subsidiaries of the Company, the fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense 
in the financial statements of the subsidiary undertaking together with the capital contribution received. In the financial statements of the 
Company, the options granted are recognised as an investment in subsidiary undertakings with a corresponding increase in equity.

Repurchase of share capital
When share capital recognised as equity is repurchased, the amount of the consideration paid, net of any tax effects, is recognised as a 
deduction from equity. Repurchased shares are classified as treasury shares and are presented as a deduction from total equity. When treasury 
shares are sold or reissued subsequently, the amount received is recognised as an increase in equity, and the resulting surplus or deficit on the 
transaction is transferred to or from retained earnings.

Own shares held by Employee Benefit Trust
Transactions of the Group sponsored Employee Benefit Trust are included in the Group financial statements. In particular, the Trust’s purchases 
of shares in the Company are debited directly to equity.

Revenue
Revenue from the sale of floorcoverings is measured at the fair value of the consideration and excludes intra-Group sales and value added and 
similar taxes. Revenue from the sale of floorcoverings is recognised when the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the goods are 
transferred to the buyer (which is the date on which goods are received by the customer), the amount of revenue can be reliably measured and it 
is probable that the economic benefits associated with the transaction will flow to the Group.

Supplier arrangements
Rebates received from suppliers comprise volume related rebates on the purchase of inventories. Volume related discounts are accrued as units 
are purchased based on the percentage rebate applicable to the forecast total purchases over the rebate period, where it is probable the rebates 
will be received and the amounts can be estimated reliably. Rebates relating to inventories purchased but still held at the balance sheet date are 
deducted from the carrying value so that the cost of inventories is recorded net of applicable rebates.

Lease payments
Leases are classified as finance leases whenever the lease transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to the Group. All other 
leases are treated as operating leases.

Assets held under finance leases are included in property, plant and equipment at the lower of fair value at the date of acquisition or the present 
value of the minimum lease payments. The capital element of outstanding finance leases is included in financial liabilities. The finance charge 
element of rentals is charged to the income statement at a constant period rate of charge on the outstanding obligations.

Payments made under operating leases are recognised in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Lease 
incentives received are recognised in the income statement as an integral part of the total lease expense.

96

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
Net financing costs
Net financing costs comprise interest payable, finance charges on shares classified as liabilities, finance leases, interest receivable on funds 
invested, foreign exchange gains and losses, and gains and losses on hedging instruments as outlined in the accounting policy relating to 
derivative financial instruments and hedging described above.

Interest income and interest payable is recognised in the income statement as it accrues, using the effective interest method. Dividend income 
is recognised in the income statement on the date the entity’s right to receive payments is established.

The Group determines the net interest expense on the net defined benefit liability for the period by applying the discount rate used to measure 
the defined benefit obligation at the beginning of the annual period to the then net defined benefit liability, taking into account any changes in 
the net defined benefit liability during the period as a result of contributions and benefit payments.

Dividends
Paid
Interim and final dividends are recognised when they are paid or when approved by the members in a general meeting. Final dividends proposed 
by the Board and unpaid at the end of the year are not recognised in the financial statements. 

Received
The Company receives dividends from its UK and Continental European subsidiaries. Dividends are recognised in the financial statements when 
they have been received by the Company. 

Taxation
Income tax comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to items 
recognised directly in equity, in which case it is recognised in equity.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the Statement of 
Financial Position date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and 
the amounts used for taxation purposes. Deferred tax is not recognised for the following temporary differences: the initial recognition of assets 
or liabilities in a transaction that is not a business combination and that affects neither accounting nor taxable profit; and differences relating to 
investments in subsidiaries to the extent that it is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future. In addition, deferred tax is not 
recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on the initial recognition of goodwill.

The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and 
liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the Statement of Financial Position date.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can 
be utilised.

Non-underlying items
In order to illustrate the underlying trading performance of the Group, presentation has been made of performance measures excluding those 
items which it is considered would distort the comparability of the Group’s results. These non-underlying items are defined as those items that, 
by virtue of their nature, size or expected frequency, warrant separate additional disclosure in the financial statements in order to fully 
understand the underlying performance of the Group.

97

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

2 SEGMENT REPORTING
On 31 December 2017, the Group had 59 operating segments in the UK and three operating segments in Continental Europe. Each segment 
represents an individual trading operation, and each operation is wholly aligned to the sales, marketing, supply and distribution of floorcovering 
products. The operating results of each operation are regularly reviewed by the Chief Operating Decision Maker, which is deemed to be the 
Group Chief Executive. Discrete financial information is available for each segment and used by the Group Chief Executive to assess 
performance and decide on resource allocation.

The operating segments have been aggregated to the extent that they have similar economic characteristics. The key economic indicators 
considered by management in assessing whether operating segments have similar economic characteristics are the products supplied, the type 
and class of customer, method of sale and distribution and the regulatory environment in which they operate.

As each operating segment is a trading operation wholly aligned to the sales, marketing, supply and distribution of floorcovering products, 
management considers all segments have similar economic characteristics except for the regulatory environment in which they operate, which 
is determined by the country in which the operating segment resides.

The Group’s internal management structure and financial reporting systems differentiate the operating segments on the basis of the differing 
economic characteristics in the UK and Continental Europe and accordingly present these as two separate reportable segments. This 
distinction is embedded in the construction of operating reports reviewed by the Group Chief Executive, the Board and the executive 
management team and forms the basis for the presentation of operating segment information given below.

UK

2017
£000

Continental Europe

2016
£000

2017
£000

2016
£000

Total

2017
£000

2016
£000

Revenue
External revenues

607,234

602,104

100,530

Reportable segment underlying operating profit

44,765

40,944

Reportable segment assets 
Reportable segment liabilities

297,325
(179,016)

263,968
(167,754)

1,271

44,515
(25,021)

91,468

793

44,516
(23,801)

707,764

46,036

341,840
(204,037)

693,572

41,737

308,484
(191,555)

During the year there were no inter-segment revenues for the reportable segments (2016: £nil).

Reconciliations of reportable segment profit, assets and liabilities and other material items:

2017
£000

2016
£000

46,036
(2,399)
(2,253)

41,384
578
(1,243)

40,719
(7,797)

32,922

41,737
(1,927)
(665)

39,145
756
(1,722)

38,179
(7,216)

30,963

Profit for the year
Total profit for reportable segments
Non-underlying items
Unallocated expense

Operating profit
Finance income
Finance expense

Profit before taxation
Taxation

Profit for the year

98

 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

2 SEGMENT REPORTING CONTINUED

Assets
Total assets for reportable segments
Unallocated assets:
  Properties, plant and equipment
  Deferred tax assets
  Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Liabilities
Total liabilities for reportable segments
Unallocated liabilities:
  Employee benefits
Income tax payable
  Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Other material items 2017
Capital expenditure
Depreciation
Non-underlying items

Other material items 2016
Capital expenditure
Depreciation
Non-underlying items

2017
£000

2016
£000

341,840

308,484

89,379
648
16,646

90,981
1,138
28,171

448,513

428,774

(204,037)

(191,555)

(12,716)
(6,339)
(6,847)

(22,951)
(6,824)
(4,077)

(229,939)

(225,407)

UK 
£000

2,443
1,933
1,722

1,808
2,388
–

Continental 
Europe 
£000

Reportable 
segment total 
£000

Unallocated 
£000

Consolidated 
total 
£000

615
690
677

872
732
–

3,058
2,623
2,399

2,680
3,120
–

–
2,291
–

283
2,156
1,927

3,058
4,914
2,399

2,963
5,276
1,927

In the UK the Group’s freehold properties are held within Headlam Group plc and a rent is charged to the operating segments for the period of 
use. Therefore, the operating reports reviewed by the Group Chief Executive show all the UK properties as unallocated and the operating 
segments report a segment result that includes a property rent. This is reflected in the above disclosure.

Each segment is a continuing operation.

The Group Chief Executive, the Board and the senior executive management team have access to information that provides details on revenue 
by principal product group for the two reportable segments, as set out in the following table:

Revenue by principal product group and geographic origin is summarised below:

Revenue
Residential
Commercial

427,484
179,750

607,234

422,048
180,056

602,104

52,920
47,610

100,530

UK

2017
£000

Continental Europe

2016
£000

2017
£000

2016
£000

46,337
45,131

91,468

Total

2017
£000

480,404
227,360

707,764

2016
£000

468,385
225,187

693,572

99

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

3 PROFIT BEFORE TAX
The following are included in profit before tax:

Depreciation on property, plant and equipment
Amortisation of intangible assets
Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment
Operating lease rentals
  Plant and machinery
  Land and buildings

2017
£000

4,914
931
(45)

2016
£000

5,276
–
(15)

11,014
2,197

10,972
2,548

Non-underlying items of £2,399,000 relate to intangibles amortisation relating to businesses acquired, acquisitions fees and non-recurring 
costs relating to personnel changes, and the related tax of £179,000 on these costs, see table below.

Non-recurring people costs
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Acquisitions fees

Auditor’s remuneration:

Audit of these financial statements
Amounts received by the Auditor and their associates in respect of:
  Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries of the Company
  Other tax advisory services
  Corporate finance services

4 STAFF NUMBERS AND COSTS
The average number of people employed, including Directors, during the year, analysed by category, was as follows:

2017
£000

677
931
791

2,399

2017
£000

87

175
–
91

353

2016
£000

1,927
–
–

1,927

2016
£000

78

172
–
–

250

Number of employees

Group

Company

2017

2016

2017

2016

2,430
19

2,449

2,276
173

2,449

2,337
11

2,348

2,200
148

2,348

–
19

19

–
19

19

Group

Company

2017
£000

80,961
1,218
10,402
5,126

97,707

2016
£000

80,336
1,239
10,213
4,984

96,772

2017
£000

3,383
403
538
883

5,207

–
11

11

–
11

11

2016
£000

3,245
338
460
343

4,386

By sector:
  Floorcoverings
  Central operations

By function:
  Sales and distribution
  Administration

The aggregate payroll costs were as follows:

Wages and salaries
Equity settled share-based payment expense (note 21)
Social security costs
Pension costs (note 20)

100

 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

5 EMOLUMENTS OF KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL
Executive and Non-Executive Directors are considered to be the key management personnel of the Group.

Short-term employee benefits
Equity settled share-based payment expense

2017
£000

2,474
507

2,981

2016
£000

3,157
304

3,461

Short-term employee benefits comprise salary and benefits earned during the year and bonuses awarded for the year. During 2016 a payment 
was made as compensation for loss of office. Further details on Directors’ remuneration, share options, long-term incentive schemes, and 
compensation for loss of office are disclosed in the Remuneration Report on page 67.

6 FINANCE INCOME AND EXPENSE

Interest income:
  Bank interest
  Other

Finance income

Interest expense:
  Bank loans, overdrafts and other financial expenses
  Net change in fair value of cash flow hedges transferred from equity
  Net interest on defined benefit plan obligations (note 20)
  Other

Finance expenses

7 TAXATION
Recognised in the income statement

Current tax expense:
  Current year
  Adjustments for prior years

Deferred tax expense:
  Origination and reversal of temporary differences
  Effect of change in tax rates
  Adjustments for prior years

2017
£000

540
38

578

(770)
–
(473)
–

(1,243)

2017
£000

8,548
(567)

7,981

(39)
(27)
(118)

(184)

2016
£000

756
–

756

(1,062)
(23)
(566)
(71)

(1,722)

2016
£000

8,434
(878)

7,556

(202)
(104)
(34)

(340)

Total tax in income statement

(7,797)

7,216

Tax relating to items (charged)/credited to equity
Current tax on:

Income and expenses recognised directly in equity

Deferred tax on:
  Share options

Income and expenses recognised directly in equity

Deferred tax on other comprehensive income:
  Defined benefit plans
  Cash flow hedge

Total tax reported directly in reserves

2017
£000

(150)

(138)
(18)

1,729
(43)

1,380

2016
£000

(2)

21
–

(778)
132

(627)

101

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

7 TAXATION CONTINUED
Factors that may affect future current and total tax charges
The UK headline corporation tax rate for the period was 19.25% (2016: 20%). The UK Budget on 16 March 2016 included a rate reduction to 17% 
from 1 April 2020 which was enacted during the prior year. The majority of the deferred tax balance in respect of UK entities has therefore been 
calculated at 17% (2016: 17%) on the basis that most of the balances will materially reverse after 1 April 2020. 

In addition, a further reduction in the French corporation tax rate to 25% by 2022 was enacted in December 2017 which has also been taken into 
account in the calculation of the related deferred tax balance.

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

Profit before tax

Tax using the UK corporation tax rate
Effect of change in UK tax rate
Effect of change in overseas tax rate
Non-deductible expenses
Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total tax in income statement 

2017

%

19.3
(0.1)
(0.1)
1.6
0.1
(1.7)

19.1

£000

40,719

7,836
(30)
(27)
646
57
(685)

7,797

2016

%

20.0
(0.1)
(0.2)
1.5
0.0
(2.3)

18.9

£000

38,179

7,636
(42)
(58)
588
4
(912)

7,216

8 CURRENT TAX LIABILITIES
The Group’s current tax liability of £6,339,000 (2016: £6,824,000) represents the amount of income tax payable in respect of current and prior 
year periods which exceed any amounts recoverable. The Company’s current tax liability of £1,329,000 (2016: £2,147,000) represents the 
amount of income tax payable in respect of current and prior year periods which exceed any amounts recoverable.

9 EARNINGS PER SHARE

Earnings
Earnings for underlying basic and underlying diluted earnings per share

Earnings for basic and diluted earnings per share

Number of shares
Issued ordinary shares at 31 December
Effect of weighted average and shares held in treasury

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share

Effect of diluted potential ordinary shares:
  Weighted average number of ordinary shares at 31 December
  Dilutive effect of share options

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

2017
£000

35,142

32,922

2016
£000

32,505

30,963

2017

2016

85,363,743
(1,183,451)

85,363,743
(1,330,339)

84,180,292

84,033,404

84,180,292
549,488

84,033,404
458,697

84,729,780

84,492,101

At 31 December 2017, the Company held 856,458 (2016: 1,123,060) shares which have been disclosed in the treasury reserve and these are 
excluded from the calculation of earnings per share.

102

 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

10 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Group property, plant and equipment

Cost
Balance at 1 January 2016
Additions
Disposals
Effect of movements in foreign exchange

Balance at 31 December 2016

Balance at 1 January 2017

Acquisitions
Additions
Disposals
Reclassification
Effect of movements in foreign exchange

Balance at 31 December 2017

Depreciation and impairment

Balance at 1 January 2016
Depreciation charge for the year
Disposals
Effect of movements in foreign exchange

Balance at 31 December 2016

Balance at 1 January 2017
Depreciation charge for the year
Disposals
Reclassification
Effect of movements in foreign exchange

Balance at 31 December 2017

Net book value
At 1 January 2016

At 31 December 2016 and 1 January 2017

At 31 December 2017

Land and 
buildings
£000

Plant and 
equipment
£000

Under 
construction 
£000

116,289
147
–
2,000

118,436

118,436

451
204
(23)
928
(129)

34,636
2,534
(2,300)
1,176

36,046

36,046

418
2,762
(1,257)
(928)
97

119,867

37,138

21,865
2,133
–
1,281

25,279

25,279
2,284
(23)
205
8

27,753

94,424

93,157

92,114

24,407
3,143
(2,219)
938

26,269

26,269
2,630
(1,113)
(205)
129

27,710

10,229

9,777

9,428

24
282
(306)
–

–

–

–
92
–
–
(3)

89

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

24

–

89

Total
£000

150,949
2,963
(2,606)
3,176

154,482

154,482

869
3,058
(1,280)
–
(35)

157,094

46,272
5,276
(2,219)
2,219

51,548

51,548
4,914
(1,136)
–
137

55,463

104,677

102,934

101,631

At 31 December 2017 the cost less accumulated depreciation of long leasehold property held by the Group was £7,430,000 (2016: £7,611,000).

103

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

10 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT CONTINUED
Company investment properties and plant and equipment

Cost
Balance at 1 January 2016
Additions
Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2016

Balance at 1 January 2017
Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2017

Depreciation
Balance at 1 January 2016
Depreciation charge for the year
Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2016

Balance at 1 January 2017
Depreciation charge for the year
Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2017

Net book value
At 1 January 2016
At 31 December 2016 and 1 January 2017

At 31 December 2017

Investment
properties
£000

Plant and 
equipment
£000

Under 
construction 
£000

103,396
–
–

103,396

103,396
–

103,396

16,867
1,694
–

18,561

18,561
1,692
–

20,253

86,529
84,835

83,143

105
1
(34)

72

72
(62)

10

20
24
(8)

36

36
5
(33)

8

85
36

2

24
282
(306)

–

–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

24
–

–

At 31 December 2017 the cost less accumulated depreciation of long leasehold property held by the Company was £7,430,000 (2016: 
£7,611,000).

11 INTANGIBLE ASSETS – GROUP

Cost
Balance at 1 January 2016 and 31 December 2016
Balance at 1 January 2017
Addition (note 24)

Balance at 31 December 2017

Amortisation
Balance at 1 January 2016 and 31 December 2016
Balance at 1 January 2017
Charge for the year

Balance at 31 December 2017

Net book value
At 1 January 2016 and 31 December 2016

At 31 December 2017

Goodwill
£000

Order book
£000

Customer
relationships
£000

13,585
13,585
23,396

36,981

3,197
3,197
–

3,197

10,388

33,784

4,832
4,832
1,370

6,202

4,832
4,832
858

5,690

–

512

–
–
5,443

5,443

–
–
45

45

–

Brand
names
£000

–
–
4,996

4,996

–
–
28

28

–

5,398

4,968

Total
£000

129
283
(340)

72

72
(62)

10

20
24
(8)

36

36
5
(33)

8

109
36

2

Total
£000

18,417
18,417
35,205

53,622

8,029
8,029
931

8,960

10,388

44,662

Cumulative impairment losses recognised in relation to goodwill is £3,197,000 (2016: £3,197,000). 

Impairment tests for cash-generating units containing goodwill (‘CGU’)
Goodwill is attributed to the businesses identified below for the purpose of testing impairment. These businesses are the lowest level at which 
goodwill is monitored and represent operating segments.

104

 
 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

11 INTANGIBLE ASSETS – GROUP CONTINUED
The aggregate carrying amounts of goodwill allocated to each CGU are as follows:

Joseph, Hamilton & Seaton
Crucial Trading
Belcolor AG
Domus Group Limited
Mitchell Carpets Limited
McMillan Flooring
Other

Reported 
segment

UK
UK
Continental Europe
UK
UK
UK
UK

2017
£000

4,348
1,369
3,342
22,955
345
96
1,329

33,784

2016
£000

4,348
1,369
3,342
–
–
–
1,329

10,388

Impairment
Each year, or whenever events or a change in the economic environment or performance indicates a risk of impairment, the Group reviews the 
value of goodwill balances allocated to its cash-generating units. 

An impairment test is a comparison of the carrying value of the assets of a business or CGU to their recoverable amount. The recoverable 
amount represents the higher of the CGU’s fair value less the cost to sell and value in use. Where the recoverable amount is less than the 
carrying value, an impairment results. During the year, all goodwill was tested for impairment, with no impairment charge resulting (2016: 
No impairment).

Value in use was determined by discounting the future cash flows generated from the continuing use of the CGU on a basis consistent with 2016, 
and applying the following key assumptions.

Key assumptions
Cash flows were projected based on actual operating results, the approved 2018 business plan and management’s assessment of planned 
performance in the period to 2022. For the purpose of impairment testing the cash flows were assumed to grow into perpetuity at a rate of 2.5% 
beyond 2022.

The main assumptions within the operating cash flows used for 2018 include the achievement of future sales volumes and prices for all key 
product lines, control of purchase prices, achievement of budgeted operating costs and no significant adverse foreign exchange rate 
movements. These assumptions have been reviewed in light of the current economic environment.

The Directors have estimated the discount rate by reference to an industry average weighted average cost of capital. This has been adjusted to 
include an appropriate risk factor to reflect current economic circumstances and the risk profile of the CGUs. A pre-tax weighted average cost of 
capital of 10.4% (2016: 10.6%) has been used for impairment testing adjusted to 11.3% (2016: 11.5%) for Continental Europe to reflect the 
differing risk profile of that segment. The pre-tax discount rate has been applied to the pre-tax cash flows. 

The CGUs in the UK have similar characteristics and risk profiles, and therefore a single discount rate has been applied to each UK CGU. Similarly, 
the Directors view the CGUs in Continental Europe as having consistent risk profiles and therefore a single risk factor has been applied. The 
CGUs in Continental Europe operate under a different regulatory environment and this is therefore reflected in the risk factor used to determine 
the discount rates in the UK and Continental Europe.

Sensitivity analysis
The Group has applied sensitivities to assess whether any reasonable possible changes in these key assumptions could cause an impairment 
that would be material to these Consolidated Financial Statements. The sensitivity analyses did not identify any material impairment risks.

105

 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

12 INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES
Summary information on investments in subsidiary undertakings is as follows:

Cost
Balance at 1 January 2016
Share options granted to employees of subsidiary undertakings

Balance at 31 December 2016

Balance at 1 January 2017
Share options granted to employees of subsidiary undertakings
Acquisitions (note 24)

Balance at 31 December 2017

Carrying value
At 1 January 2016

At 31 December 2016

At 31 December 2017

£000

89,806
901

90,707

90,707
815
29,118

120,640

89,806

90,707

120,640

A full list of the Group’s subsidiaries are listed on page 128. There were no impairments recognised on the Company’s investments in subsidiaries 
in the year ended 31 December 2017.

13 DEFERRED TAX ASSETS AND LIABILITIES – GROUP
Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Employee benefits
Hedging
Other items

Tax assets/(liabilities)
Set-off of tax

Movement in deferred tax during the year

Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Employee benefits
Hedging
Other items

Movement in deferred tax during the prior year

Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Employee benefits
Hedging
Other items

Assets

Liabilities

Net

2017
£000

–
–
2,892
–
558

3,450
(2,802)

648

2016
£000

–
–
4,792
–
360

5,152
(4,014)

1,138

2017
£000

(7,552)
(2,097)
–
–
–

(9,649)
2,802

(6,847)

2016
£000

(7,871)
(180)
–
(40)
–

(8,091)
4,014

(4,077)

2017
£000

(7,552)
(2,097)
2,892
–
558

(6,199)
–

(6,199)

2016
£000

(7,871)
(180)
4,792
(40)
360

(2,939)
–

(2,939)

1 January 
2017 
£000

Brought in on
acquisition
£000

Recognised in 
income 
£000

Recognised 
in equity 
£000

31 December 
2017 
£000

(7,871)
(180)
4,792
(40)
360

(2,939)

–
(2,078)
–
–
164

(1,914)

255
161
(266)
–
34

184

64
–
(1,634)
40
–

(1,530)

(7,552)
(2,097)
2,892
–
558

(6,199)

1 January 
2016 
£000

Brought in on
acquisition
£000

Recognised 
in income 
£000

Recognised 
in equity 
£000

31 December 
2016 
£000

(8,267)
(206)
4,061
92
416

(3,904)

–
–
–
–
–

–

396
26
(25)
–
(57)

340

–
–
756
(132)
1

625

(7,871)
(180)
4,792
(40)
360

(2,939)

Unrecognised deferred tax assets and liabilities
At the Statement of Financial Position date the Group has unused capital losses of £10,797,000 (2016: £10,797,000) available for offset against 
future chargeable gains. No deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of this amount as the Directors do not anticipate incurring 
significant chargeable gains in the foreseeable future.

106

 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

13 DEFERRED TAX ASSETS AND LIABILITIES – COMPANY
Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

Assets

Liabilities

Net

2017
£000

–
1,795
–
54

1,849
(1,849)

–

2016
£000

–
3,324
–
48

3,372
(3,372)

–

Property, plant and equipment
Employee benefits
Hedging
Other items

Tax assets/(liabilities)
Set-off of tax

Movement in deferred tax during the year

Property, plant and equipment
Employee benefits
Hedging
Other items

Movement in deferred tax during the prior year

Property, plant and equipment
Employee benefits
Hedging
Other items

2017
£000

(6,287)
–
–
–

(6,287)
1,849

(4,438)

1 January 
2017 
£000

(6,571)
3,324
(40)
48

(3,239)

1 January 
2016 
£000

(6,817)
3,063
93
46

(3,615)

2016
£000

(6,571)
–
(40)
–

(6,611)
3,372

(3,239)

2017
£000

(6,287)
1,795
–
54

(4,438)
–

(4,438)

2016
£000

(6,571)
3,324
(40)
48

(3,239)
–

(3,239)

Recognised 
in income 
£000

Recognised 
in equity 
£000

31 December 
2017 
£000

284
(279)
–
6

11

–
(1,250)
40
–

(1,210)

(6,287)
1,795
–
54

(4,438)

Recognised 
in income 
£000

Recognised 
in equity 
£000

31 December 
2016 
£000

246
(176)
–
2

72

–
437
(133)
–

304

(6,571)
3,324
(40)
48

(3,239)

Unrecognised deferred tax assets and liabilities
At the Statement of Financial Position date the Company has unused capital losses of £10,797,000 (2016: £10,797,000) available for offset 
against future chargeable gains. No deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of this amount as the Directors do not anticipate incurring 
significant chargeable gains in the foreseeable future.

14 INVENTORIES

Goods for resale

Balance as at 31 December

Cost of sales consists of the following:

Material cost
Processing cost

Group

2017
£000

2016
£000

131,566

126,037

Group

2017
£000

485,455
2,228

487,683

2016
£000

478,046
3,022

481,068

Company

2017
£000

–

Company

2017
£000

–
–

–

2016
£000

–

2016
£000

–
–

–

The cost of inventories within cost of sales stated above includes movements in the provision for obsolete inventory of £727,000 release 
(2016: £245,000 release).

107

 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

15 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Trade receivables
Prepayments and accrued income
Other receivables
Derivative assets used for economic hedging:
Other derivatives at fair value
Amounts due from subsidiary undertakings

Group

Company

2017
£000

94,652
5,105
28,211

8
–

2016
£000

97,589
4,483
26,630

232
–

127,976

128,934

2017
£000

–
392
468

–
20,460

21,320

2016
£000

–
530
297

232
16,292

17,351

Other receivables include balances totalling £120,000 that fall due after more than 1 year (2016: £nil).

£1,198,000 (2016: £849,000) was recognised as an impairment loss in the Consolidated Income Statement in respect of trade receivables. 

The impairment loss is attributable to the reportable segments as follows:

UK
Continental Europe

2017
£000

995
203

1,198

16 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

Cash
Bank overdrafts

Cash and cash equivalents per Statement of Financial Position

Group

Company

2017
£000

42,030
–

42,030

2016
£000

59,343
(4)

59,339

2017
£000

16,646
–

16,646

2016
£000

734
115

849

2016
£000

28,171
–

28,171

17 OTHER INTEREST-BEARING LOANS AND BORROWINGS
This note provides information about the contractual terms of the Group’s and Company’s interest-bearing loans and borrowings. 

On 7 December 2017, the Group completed a refinancing to increase its existing facilities; this was to maintain sufficient headroom throughout 
the year whilst allowing funds for the Groups acquisition and investment initiatives. The Group has maintained two separate agreements with 
Barclays Bank PLC and HSBC Bank Plc and these include both Sterling and Euro term facilities. The Group’s additional funding, increase the level 
of Sterling committed facilities from £47.5 million to £72.5 million, alongside its Euro facilities of €8.6 million. The Group’s new banking 
arrangements run to 7 December 2021. The Group also has short term uncommitted facilities which continue at £25 million, and are renewable 
on an annual basis. The total banking facilities available to the Group at 31 December 2017 were £112,464,000 (2016: £87,651,000).

For more information about the Group’s and Company’s exposure to interest rate and foreign currency risk, see note 23.

Current liabilities
Interest-bearing loan

Non-current liabilities
Interest-bearing loans

Group

2017
£000

233

233

6,519

6,519

2016
£000

224

224

6,493

6,493

Company

2017
£000

2016
£000

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

The Group has undrawn borrowing facilities at 31 December 2017, which amounted to £105,712,000 (2016: £80,931,000). The facility conditions 
for drawdown had been met during the period. The facility is unsecured and there is a cross guarantee in place between the Company and its UK, 
French and Dutch subsidiaries. There is a downstream guarantee from the Company in relation to its borrowing facility in the Netherlands and 
France. Covenant calculations have been prepared for the year ending 31 December 2017 and there were no breaches.

108

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

17 OTHER INTEREST-BEARING LOANS AND BORROWINGS CONTINUED
The undrawn borrowing facilities are as follows:

UK
Netherlands
France
Switzerland

Interest 
rate 
%

1.57
2.03
1.30
1.65

2017
£000

97,500
1,313
3,107
3,792

105,712

Interest 
rate 
%

1.32
2.13
1.15
2.20 

2016
£000

72,500
1,466
2,984
3,981

80,931

All the borrowing facilities above bear interest at floating rates. The Swiss facility may be drawn as an overdraft or fixed rate loan with different 
rates depending on the term and amount.

Changes in net funds

Cash at bank and in hand
Debt due within one year
Debt due after one year

18 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Current

Trade payables
Taxation and social security
Non-trade payables and accrued expenses
Amounts due to subsidiary undertakings
Derivative liabilities used for economic hedging:
  Other derivatives at fair value

At  
1 January 2017
£000

Cash flows
£000

Acquisitions
£000

59,339
(224)
(6,493)

52,622

(19,407)
–
7,272

(12,135)

2,171
–
(7,042)

(4,871)

Foreign 
exchange 
movements
£000

At  
31 December 
2017
£000

(73)
(9)
(256)

(338)

42,030
(233)
(6,519)

35,278

Group

2017
£000

149,594
17,954
22,751
–

2016
£000

141,999
16,617
24,658
–

Company

2017
£000

1,343
2,112
3,519
34,806

2016
£000

578
2,172
3,507
31,886

–

30

–

–

190,299

183,304

41,780

38,143

Included within current non-trade payables and accrued expenses is an amount of £nil for accrued interest on unsecured bank loans (2016: £nil).

The Group’s exposure to currency and liquidity risk related to trade and other payables is disclosed in note 23.

Non-current

Non-trade payables and accrued expenses

Group

Company

2017
£000

4,938

4,938

2016
£000

–

–

2017
£000

4,938

4,938

2016
£000

–

–

Non-current non-trade payables and accrued expenses relate to discounted deferred consideration for Domus Group of Companies Limited.

19 PROVISIONS

Balance at 1 January
Acquired on acquisition
Charged/(credited) to the income statement:
Additional provisions

Balance at 31 December

The property provisions relate to property dilapidations.

Property

2017
£000

1,531
195

322

2,048

2016
£000

1,087
–

444

1,531

109

 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

20 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
During the year, the Group operated UK and Swiss defined benefit plans and defined contribution plans in the UK, France and the Netherlands. 

UK defined benefit plan
The Headlam Group plc Staff Retirement Benefits Scheme is the principal defined benefit plan which provides pensions in retirement and death 
benefits to members. The majority of members are entitled to receive pensions from age 65, equal to either 1/50 or 1/60 of final salary for each 
year of service that the employee provided, depending on which section of the plan the member is part of.

The plan is a registered scheme under UK legislation. The plan is legally separated from the Company and assets are held independently of the 
Company’s finances. 

The plan is subject to the scheme funding requirements outlined in UK legislation.

The Company has a right to a refund of any surplus in the plan if the plan winds up, after payment of expenses, members benefits and any 
enhancements to the members’ benefits as the Trustee sees fit. In addition, if the assets of the plan exceed the estimate by the actuary of the 
cost of buying out the benefits of all beneficiaries with an insurance company, including the associated expenses, and the plan is not being 
wound up, then the Company may request a payment of the excess funds. There have been no payments made to the Company out of the plan’s 
assets over the year, and so no additional liability has been recognised on the balance sheet.

The plan was established from 11 February 1983 under trust and is governed by the plan’s Trust Deed and Rules dated 26 March 2015.  
The Trustee of the plan comprises two employee representatives and four employer representatives. The Trustee of the plan is required by law 
to act in the best interests of the plan participants. The Trustee is responsible for the operation and the governance of the plan, including  
making decisions regarding the plan’s funding and investment strategy in conjunction with the Company.

The ultimate cost of the plan to the Company will depend upon actual future events rather than the assumptions made. Many of the 
assumptions made are unlikely to be borne out in practice and as such the cost of the plan may be higher (or lower) than disclosed.

The plan exposes the Company to actuarial risks such as longevity risk, interest rate risk, market (investment) risk and currency risk. The risk to 
the Company is that the assumptions underlying the disclosures, or the calculation of contribution requirements, are not borne out in practice 
and the cost to the company is higher than expected. This could result in higher contributions required from the Company and a higher deficit 
disclosed. More specifically, the assumptions not being borne out in practice could include:
•  The return on the plan assets being lower than assumed, resulting in an unaffordable increase in the required Company contribution rate.
•  Falls in asset values not being matched by similar falls in the value of liabilities. 
• 

Inflation being higher than that assumed, resulting in an increase in the value of the members’ benefits and therefore a higher cost to  
the plan.

•  Unanticipated future changes in mortality patterns leading to an increase in the plan’s liabilities. Future mortality rates cannot be predicted 

with certainty. 

•  The potential exercise of options against the plan, for example taking early retirement or exchanging a portion of pension for a cash  

lump sum.

There have been no amendments, curtailments or settlements made to the plan during 2017.

The plan’s investment strategy is to invest broadly 90% in return seeking assets and 10% in matching assets, mainly government bonds.  
This strategy reflects the plan’s liability profile and the Trustee’s and Company’s attitude to risk. The matching fund seeks to match the return 
achieved on the liabilities.

The plan’s investments include interest rate and inflation hedging.

The plan holds a number of annuity policies which match a portion of the pensions in payment.

The plan is funded partly by contributions from members and partly by contributions from the Company at rates advised by professionally 
qualified actuaries. The last scheme funding valuation of the plan was as at 31 March 2014 and revealed a funding deficit of £10,883,000.  
A scheme funding valuation of the plan as at 31 March 2017 is currently ongoing and the preliminary results of this valuation reported a reduction 
in deficit from £10,883,000 to £2,388,000. The main factors that have combined to produce this change in the position since the last formal 
valuation are shown in the following table: 

Deficit as at 31 March 2014
Interest on deficit
Gain on investments
Contributions paid to repair the deficit
Change in market conditions
Changes in mortality assumptions
Other factors

Preliminary deficit as at 31 March 2017

£m

(10.9)
(1.6)
26.7
8.4
(31.3)
4.2
2.1

(2.4)

The main annual rate assumptions used by the actuary in the 2014 valuation were: increase in salaries 4.80%; increase of pensions in payment 
3.30%; discount rate before retirement 5.46%; discount rate after retirement 3.71%; and inflation 3.30%. Assets were taken at their market value 
at the valuation date. 

110

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

20 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS CONTINUED
Under the recovery plan dated 26 March 2015 the Company is due to pay contributions of £186,741 per month form 1 January 2018, increasing 
by 3.3% each subsequent 1 January, with the view to eliminating the shortfall by 30 April 2019. However the scheme funding valuation as at  
31 March 2017 is currently ongoing and a new recovery plan may come into place, which may affect the level of payments made to the Plan.

The main annual rate assumptions used by the actuary to produce the preliminary 2017 valuation results were: increase in salaries 4.69%; 
increase of pensions in payment 3.19%; discount rate before retirement 3.66%; discount rate after retirement 1.91%; and inflation 3.19%. 

In accordance with the recovery plan dated 26 March 2015, payments were made to the plan during 2017 of £2,164,000 towards the deficit.  
The Company is expected to pay contributions of £3,122,000 over the next accounting period. This includes £2,235,000 for payments under  
the recovery plan and £887,000 for the accrual of benefits.

In addition to the recovery payments, under the schedule of contributions dated 26 March 2015, Company contributions are fixed at 35% of 
pensionable salaries each month.

In addition, the Company is expected to meet the cost of administrative expenses and insurance premiums for the plan. 

The liabilities of the plan are based on the current value of expected benefit payment cash flows to members of the plan over the next 60 years 
or more. The weighted average duration of the liabilities is approximately 21 years.

During 2010, the UK Government announced a move to adopting Consumer Price Inflation (‘CPI’) rather than Retail Price Inflation (‘RPI’) as  
the basis for inflation assumptions underpinning retirement benefit obligations. The Directors have considered this change and associated 
guidance. Having taken advice, the Company has determined that RPI remains the appropriate basis for measuring its obligations, such that  
the change announced has had no impact on the Group’s retirement benefit obligations.
.
Swiss defined benefit plan
The plan provides occupational retirement, disability and survivors’ benefits. The members are entitled to receive pensions from age 64 (female) 
or 65 (male), equal to the old age savings balance multiplied with a conversion rate of 6.8% for the mandatory part of the savings balance and 
5.2% for the part beyond the mandatory part. The minimum interest rate on old age savings has legally been fixed. 

The Company left the Columna Sammelstiftung on 1 January 2016 and affiliated to the Sammelstiftung berufliche Vorsorge Swiss Life, 
Sammelstiftung mit Anlagerisiko. The pension plans remained unchanged. The plan is legally separated from the Company. The executive body 
of the collective foundation is the board of trustees, which is elected directly by the insured of the affiliated companies/occupational benefits 
funds and functions independently of Swiss Life. Its members include employer and employee representatives from a wide range of occupations 
and companies of different sizes. The board of trustees’ responsibilities include, among other things, supervising compliance with legal 
provisions and issuing the regulations that govern the various activities. The Company elects an occupational benefits fund commission (OBC). 

The collective foundation is reinsured for risk benefits with Swiss Life insurance company. 

The plan exposes the Company to the market (investment) risk. The risk to the Company is that return on assets may be lower than legally 
required. This could result in higher contributions required from the Company and a higher deficit disclosed. 

There have been no amendments, curtailments or settlements made to the plan during 2017.

The occupational benefits fund commission (OBC) defines the investment strategy; the affiliated occupational benefits fund itself bears the 
investment risk. The investments are managed with Credit Suisse. 

The last (provisional) scheme funding valuation of the plan was as at 31 December 2016 and revealed cover ratio of 113.34% (overfunding).  
This overfunding is appropriate to Swiss legislation and cannot be considered in the context of IAS 19. According to Swiss rules there is no need 
to evaluate the scheme using assumptions for future changes of salary increase, benefit increase or inflation. 

The last IAS 19 valuation at year-end 2017 revealed a funding deficit of £2,591,000 (2016: £4,325,000). The Group is expected to pay £334,000 
for future service costs over the next accounting period. 

The liabilities of the plan are based on the current value of expected benefit payment cash flows to members of the plan over the next 50 years 
or more. The weighted average duration of the liabilities is approximately 20.0 years.

111

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

20 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS CONTINUED
Defined benefit obligation
In the UK there is no contractual agreement or stated Group policy for allocating the net defined benefit liability between the participating 
subsidiaries and as such the full deficit is recognised by the Company, which is the sponsoring employer. The participating subsidiary companies 
have recognised a cost equal to contributions payable for the period as advised by a professionally qualified actuary. The Company recognises  
a cost equal to its contributions payable for the period net of amounts recharged in relation to the Group deficit to the participating subsidiary 
companies.

Group

2017
£000

2016
£000

Company

2017
£000

2016
£000

(139,048)
126,709

(141,947)
119,339

(126,308)
116,560

(128,002)
109,719

(12,339)

(22,608)

(9,748)

(18,283)

(377)

(343)

–

–

(12,716)

(22,951)

(9,748)

(18,283)

(2,235)
(10,481)

(12,716)

(2,169)
(20,781)

(22,951)

(2,235)
(7,513)

(9,748)

(2,169)
(16,114)

(18,283)

Group

2017
£000

141,947
2,488
(511)
3,479
6,827
(4,598)
(6,552)
(3,740)
–
384
(676)

2016
£000

115,849
2,061
–
3,863
26,825
(358)
(571)
(5,675)
(2,587)
392
2,148

Company

2017
£000

128,002
1,628
–
3,410
7,527
(4,598)
(6,221)
(3,592)
–
152
–

2016
£000

102,766
1,329
–
3,734
25,640
–
(535)
(5,103)
–
171
–

139,048

141,947

126,308

128,002

Group

Company

2017
£000

119,339
3,006
4,804

1,222
2,164
384
(3,740)
–
(470)

2016
£000

97,167
3,297
21,560

1,336
2,171
392
(5,675)
(2,587)
1,678

2017
£000

109,719
2,957
4,265

895
2,164
152
(3,592)
–
–

2016
£000

86,601
3,194
21,673

1,012
2,171
171
(5,103)
–
–

126,709

119,339

116,560

109,719

Present value of funded defined benefit obligations
Fair value of plan assets

Net obligations

Other long-term employee benefits

Total employee benefits

Analysed as:
Current liabilities
Non-current liabilities

Total employee benefits

Movements in present value of defined benefit obligation

At 1 January
Current service cost
Past service costs
Interest cost
Net remeasurement losses/(gains) – financial
Net remeasurement (gains)/losses – demographic
Net remeasurement (gains)/losses – experience
Benefits paid
Settlement
Contributions by members
Effect of movements in foreign exchange

At 31 December

Movements in fair value of plan assets

At 1 January
Interest income on plan assets
Return on assets, excluding interest income
Contributions by employer:
  Future service contributions
  Past service deficit contributions
Contributions by members
Benefits paid
Settlement
Effect of movements in foreign exchange

At 31 December

112

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

20 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS CONTINUED
The fair value of the plan assets were as follows:

Equities
Government debt
Corporate bonds
Annuities
Hedge funds
Other

Group

Company

2017
£000

58,062
14,760
29,630
5,074
2,918
16,265

2016
£000

38,672
21,220
32,514
5,442
699
20,792

2017
£000

55,194
14,760
25,415
5,074
2,918
13,199

2016
£000

36,357
21,220
27,566
5,442
699
18,435

126,709

119,339

116,560

109,719

Expense recognised in the income statement relating to defined benefit obligation

Service cost 
Net interest on the net defined benefit liability (note 6)

Total

The expenses recognised in the following line items in the Consolidated Income Statement are:

Administrative expenses
Net financing income (note 6)

Remeasurement of the net defined benefit liability in the Statement of Comprehensive Income:

Net remeasurement – financial
Net remeasurement – demographic
Net remeasurement – experience
Return on assets, excluding interest income

Group

2017
£000

1,977
473

2,450

Group

2017
£000

1,977
473

2,450

2016
£000

2,061
566

2,627

2016
£000

2,061
566

2,627

Group

2017
£000

6,827
(4,598)
(6,552)
(4,804)

(9,127)

2016
£000

26,825
(358)
(571)
(21,560)

4,336

113

 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

20 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS CONTINUED
Principal actuarial assumptions are as follows:

Discount rate

Future salary increases

Future pension increases

Inflation rate

Mortality table assumptions:
  UK pre-retirement

 UK post-retirement – future 
pensioners

  UK post-retirement –  
  current pensioners

UK

2017
%

2.4

4.9

3.4

3.4

2016
%

2.7

4.9

3.4

3.4

AC00 (Ultimate) table

AC00 (Ultimate) table

96%(M)/98%(F) of the 
S1PA tables with 
future improvements 
from 2007 in line with 
the CMI mortality 
projections model 
CMI_2016 with a 
long-term rate of 
improvement of 1.5% 
per annum.

96%(M)/98%(F) of the 
S1PA tables with 
future improvements 
from 2007 in line with 
the CMI mortality 
projections model 
CMI_2016 with a 
long-term rate of 
improvement of 1.5% 
per annum.

94%(M)/100%(F) of 
the S1PA tables with 
future improvements 
from 2004 in line with 
the CMI mortality 
projections model 
CMI_2013 with a 
long-term rate of 
improvement of 1.5% 
per annum.

94%(M)/100%(F) of 
the S1PA tables with 
future improvements 
from 2004 in line with 
the CMI mortality 
projections model 
CMI_2013 with a 
long-term rate of 
improvement of 1.5% 
per annum.

Swiss

2017
%

0.8

2.0

–

2.0

–

2016
%

0.5

2.0

–

2.0

–

  Swiss scheme

–

–

BVG 2015

BVG 2015

The mortality assumption implies the expected future lifetime from age 65 is as follows:

Non-pensioner male
Pensioner male
Non-pensioner female
Pensioner female

Group

Company

2017
£000

24.3
22.5
26.1
24.2

2016
£000

25.2
22.9
27.1
24.8

2017
£000

24.3
22.5
26.1
24.2

2016
£000

25.2
22.9
27.1
24.8

Company
The principal actuarial assumptions for the Company are the same as those disclosed for the UK above.

Sensitivity analysis
The tables below for the UK and Swiss defined benefit plans show the impact on the defined benefit obligation of changing each of the most 
significant assumptions in isolation.

114

 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

20 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS CONTINUED
UK defined benefit plan

Effect in £millions

Discount rate
Rate of inflation (RPI)*
Salary increases
Assumed life expectancy

Impact on scheme liabilities  
2017

Impact on scheme liabilities  
2016

Change in assumption

Increase

Decrease

Increase

Decrease

0.25% movement
0.25% movement
0.25% movement
one year movement

(6.3)
5.7
1.3
6.1

6.8
(5.3)
(1.3)
(6.2)

(6.8)
6.2
1.6
5.8

7.3
(5.8)
(1.6)
(6.0)

*   With corresponding changes to the salary and pension increase assumptions.

The figures in the table as at 31 December 2017 have been calculated using the same valuation method that was used to calculate the UK 
defined benefit obligation at the same date. The figures in the table as at 31 December 2016 have been calculated by applying the same 
percentage increase or decrease as at 31 December 2017.

Extrapolation of the sensitivity analysis beyond the ranges shown may not be appropriate.

Swiss defined benefit plan

Effect in £millions

Discount rate
Rate of inflation (RPI)*
Salary increases
Assumed life expectancy

Impact on scheme liabilities 
2017

Impact on scheme liabilities 
2016

Change in assumption

Increase

Decrease

Increase

Decrease

0.25% movement
0.25% movement
0.25% movement
one year movement

(0.6)
0.5
0.1
0.1

0.7
–
(0.1)
(0.1)

(0.7)
0.5
0.1
0.2

0.8
–
(0.1)
(0.1)

*  With corresponding changes to the salary and pension increase assumptions.

The figures in the table as at 31 December 2017 have been calculated using the same valuation method that was used to calculate the Swiss 
defined benefit obligation at the same date. The figures in the table as at 31 December 2016 have been calculated by applying the same 
percentage increase or decrease as at 31 December 2017.

Extrapolation of the sensitivity analysis beyond the ranges shown may not be appropriate.

History of plans
The history of the plans for the current and prior periods is as follows:

Statement of Financial Position

Group

Present value of defined benefit obligation
Fair value of plan assets

Deficit

Company

Present value of defined benefit obligation
Fair value of plan assets

Deficit

2017
£000

2016
£000

2015
£000

2014
£000

(139,048)
126,709

(141,947)
119,339

(115,849)
97,167

(117,639)
96,190

(12,339)

(22,608)

(18,682)

(21,449)

2017
£000

2016
£000

2015
£000

2014
£000

(126,308)
116,560

(128,002)
109,719

(102,766)
86,601

(106,297)
86,907

2013
£000

(97,085)
82,263

(14,822)

2013
£000

(87,111)
73,704

(9,748)

(18,283)

(16,165)

(19,390)

(13,407)

The Group operated an employment indemnity scheme in connection with a foreign subsidiary undertaking to provide for lump sum cash 
payments due to employees retiring on their normal retirement date. The present value of the retirement indemnity obligation at 31 December 
2017 is £377,000 (2016: £343,000). This was reported as other long-term employee benefits within the employee benefits disclosure.

Total Group pension costs
Included within the total staff costs as disclosed in note 4 are costs relating to the Group’s defined contribution plans. The pension cost for the 
year represents contributions payable by the Group to the plans and amounted to £3,149,000 (2016: £2,922,000). Contributions amounting to 
£180,000 (2016: £176,000) in respect of the December 2017 payroll were paid in January 2018.

The total Group cost of operating the plans during the year was £5,126,000 (2016: £4,984,000) and, at 31 December 2017, there was an amount 
of £316,000 (2016: £319,000) owed to the plans, being employer and employee contributions due for December 2017, which was paid in 
January 2018.

115

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

21 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
Group and Company
Executive Directors and executive management currently participate in executive share option schemes. The option price may not be less than 
the greater of the mid-market value of the Group’s shares at the time when the options were granted or the nominal value. Options granted 
under the 1998 Inland Revenue approved scheme are normally exercisable between the third and tenth anniversaries of their date of grant, 
subject to the movement of the Group’s basic earnings per share exceeding RPI over the relevant period.

Options granted under the 1998 unapproved scheme are normally exercisable between the third and seventh anniversaries of their date of 
grant. Awards are subject to the movement of the Group’s basic earnings per share exceeding RPI between 3% and 5% per annum respectively 
over the relevant period.

Additionally, the Group operates a savings-related share option scheme (‘Sharesave scheme’) which is open to employees subject to eligibility 
criteria determined by the Directors prior to each option grant. The most recent grant was on 3 May 2017 when employees with over one 
month’s service were invited to participate. 

The Group also operates a 2008 HMRC approved scheme, a 2008 unapproved scheme, the Headlam Group Performance Share Plan 2008 and 
the Headlam Group Co-Investment Plan 2008. Further details of these schemes and plans are given in the Remuneration Report on pages 60 
to 73.

The terms and conditions of the grants are as follows, whereby all options are settled by physical delivery of shares:

Number of instruments

Grant date/employees entitled

2017

2016 Vesting conditions

Five-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 11 May 2012

Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 10 May 2013

Five-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 10 May 2013

Headlam Group Co-Investment Plan 2008 
granted to key management 1 April 2014*

Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 8 May 2014

Five-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 8 May 2014

Headlam Group Co-Investment Plan 2008 
granted to key management 1 May 2015*

Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 5 May 2015

Five-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 5 May 2015

Headlam Group Co-Investment Plan 2008 
granted to key management 6 May 2016*

Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 4 May 2016

Five-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 4 May 2016

Headlam Group Performance Share Plan 2008 
granted to key management 5 July 2017*

Three-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 3 May 2017

Five-year Sharesave scheme granted to other 
employees 3 May 2017

–

–

49,400 Continuous service

656 Continuous service

36,662

42,136 Continuous service

–

–

243,585 If the real earnings per share growth is over 3% 

p.a. – 50% vesting, over 6% – 100% vesting. 
TSR – if Company is ranked at median or 
above – 50%, upper quartile – 100%

160,970 Continuous service

52,661

58,959 Continuous service

225,874

225,874 If the real earnings per share growth is over 3% 

p.a. – 50% vesting, over 6% – 100% vesting. 
TSR – if Company is ranked at median or 
above – 50%, upper quartile – 100%

296,593

342,107 Continuous service

204,855

211,736 Continuous service

162,647

162,647 If the real earnings per share growth is over 3% 

p.a. – 50% vesting, over 6% – 100% vesting. 
TSR – if Company is ranked at median or 
above – 50%, upper quartile – 100%

219,801

248,631 Continuous service

47,044

48,167 Continuous service

239,045

– Awards will vest between 25% and 100% for 

performance between ‘threshold’ 
performance and ‘maximum’ performance

216,906

– Continuous service

34,725

– Continuous service

Contractual life 
of options

01/07/17 – 
01/01/18

01/07/16 – 
01/01/17

01/07/18 – 
01/01/19

02/04/17 – 
02/04/24

01/07/17 – 
01/01/18

01/07/19 – 
01/01/20

02/05/18 – 
02/05/25

01/07/18 – 
01/01/19

01/07/20 – 
01/01/21

07/05/19 – 
07/05/26

01/07/19 – 
01/01/20

01/07/21 – 
01/01/22

06/07/20 – 
06/07/27

01/07/20 – 
01/01/21

01/07/22 – 
01/01/23

Total share options

1,736,812

1,794,868

*   Further details are provided on pages 60 to 73 of the Remuneration Report.

116

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

21 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS CONTINUED
The number and weighted average exercise prices of share options are as follows:

Outstanding at the beginning of the year
Exercised during the year
Granted during the year
Lapsed during the year

Outstanding at the end of the year

Exercisable at the end of the year

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 
2017

230.9
172.2
261.8
346.9

249.3

–

Number 
of options 
2017

1,794,868
(466,602)
502,931
(94,385)

1,736,812

–

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 
2016

225.4
(266.7)
231.9
(158.9)

230.9

274.0

Number 
of options 
2016

1,606,790
(158,532)
539,281
(192,671)

1,794,868

656

The weighted average share price for options exercised during the year was 591.0p (2016: 434.5p).

The options outstanding at the year end have an exercise price in the range of 0.0p to 499.0p and a weighted average contractual life of 2.2 years.

The fair value of services received in return for share options granted are measured by reference to the fair value of share options granted. In 
order to estimate the fair value of the services received the Company uses an appropriate option pricing model, either the Black–Scholes or the 
Monte Carlo option pricing model.

It is expected that the options will be exercised as soon as they reach maturity. 

The expected volatility is based on historic volatility calculated over the weighted average remaining life of the share options.

Details of share options granted during 2017 are shown below:

2017

Number of options

Fair value at measurement date:
  No performance conditions
  Performance conditions

Share price at 31 December
Exercise price
Expected volatility 
Option life 
Dividend yield
Risk-free rate of interest 

Details of share options granted during 2016 are shown below: 

2016

Number of options
Fair value at measurement date:
  No performance conditions
  Performance conditions

Share price at 31 December
Exercise price
Expected volatility 
Option life 
Dividend yield
Risk-free rate of interest 

EPS 80% & 
TSR 20%

EPS 80% & 
TSR 20% 

Three-year 
Performance
Share Plan 
2008

Three-year 
Sharesave 
scheme

239,045

228,260

Five-year 
Sharesave 
scheme

35,626

–
471.9p

184.2p
–

169.2p
–

536.8p
–
47.7%
three years
4.3% p.a.
0.4% p.a.

600.0p
499.0p
47.7%
three years
3.9% p.a.
0.2% p.a.

600.0p
499.0p
39.2%
five years
3.9% p.a.
0.5% p.a.

Three-year 
Co-Investment 
Plan 
2008

Three-year 
Sharesave 
scheme

226,791

252,330

–
418.5p

133.8p
–

487.8p
–
43.8%
three years
4.3% p.a.
0.6% p.a.

487.8p
400.2p
43.8%
three years
4.3% p.a.
0.6% p.a.

Five-year 
Sharesave 
scheme

60,160

118.2p
–

487.8p
400.2p
35.1%
five years
4.3% p.a.
0.9% p.a.

117

 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

21 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS CONTINUED
The total expenses recognised for the year arising from share-based payments are as follows:

Share options granted in 2011 under the SAYE 

five-year scheme 

Share options granted in 2012 under the SAYE 

five-year scheme

Share options granted in 2013 under the SAYE 
three-year scheme
Share options granted in 2013 under the SAYE 

five-year scheme

Headlam Group Co-Investment Plan 2008 (awarded 

2014)

Share options granted in 2014 under the SAYE 

three-year scheme

Share options granted in 2014 under the SAYE 

five-year scheme

Headlam Group Co-Investment Plan 2008 (awarded 

2015)

Share options granted in 2015 under the SAYE 

three-year scheme

Share options granted in 2015 under the SAYE 

five-year scheme

Headlam Group Co-Investment Plan 2008 (awarded 

2016)

Share options granted in 2016 under the SAYE 

three-year scheme

Share options granted in 2016 under the SAYE 

five-year scheme

Share options granted in 2017 under the SAYE 

three-year scheme

Share options granted in 2017 under the SAYE 

five-year scheme

Headlam Group Performance Share Plan 2016 

(awarded 2017)

Total expense recognised

22 CAPITAL AND RESERVES
Share capital

Number of shares
On issue at 1 January and 31 December – authorised
On issue at 1 January and 31 December – fully paid

Allotted, called up and fully paid
Ordinary shares of 5p each

Shares classified as liabilities
Shares classified in Shareholders’ funds

Group

2017
£000

–

5

–

7

104

27

39

315

138

52

204

90

11

75

6

145

1,218

2016
£000

6

14

10

7

408

76

39

284

138

52

138

59

8

–

–

–

1,239

Company

2017
£000

2016
£000

Subsidiaries

2017
£000

–

–

–

–

35

1

6

–

–

–

–

137

1

5

140

126

3

–

93

–

–

1

–

124

403

6

–

63

–

–

–

–

–

338

–

5

–

7

69

26

33

175

135

52

111

90

11

74

6

21

815

2016
£000

6

14

10

7

271

75

34

158

132

52

75

59

8

–

–

–

901

Ordinary shares

2017

2016

107,840,000 107,840,000
85,363,743

85,363,743

2017
£000

4,268

4,268

–
4,268

4,268

2016
£000

4,268

4,268

–
4,268

4,268

At 31 December 2017, the Company held 856,458 (2016: 1,123,060) shares which have been disclosed in the treasury reserve. Dividends are not 
payable on these shares and they are excluded from the calculation of earnings per share. The shares held in treasury represent 1.0% (2016: 
1.3%) of the issued share capital with a nominal value of £42,823 (2016: £56,153).

In the period from 31 December 2017 to 6 March 2018 no shares have been purchased by the Company.

118

 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

22 CAPITAL AND RESERVES CONTINUED
Ordinary shares
The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time and are entitled to one vote per share at meetings 
of the Company.

Dividends

Interim dividend for 2016 of 6.70p paid 3 January 2017
Special dividend for 2016 of 8.00p paid 24 April 2017
Final dividend for 2016 of 15.85p paid 1 July 2017
Interim dividend for 2015 of 6.00p paid 2 January 2016
Special dividend for 2015 of 6.00p paid 25 April 2016
Final dividend for 2015 of 14.70p paid 1 July 2016

2017
£000

5,637
6,732
13,360
–
–
–

25,729

2016
£000

–
–
–
5,048
5,048
12,368

22,464

Interim dividends of 7.55p per share (2016: 6.70p per share) are provided for when the dividend is paid. The dividend was paid on 3 January 2018 
and totalled £6,372,000.

The final proposed dividend of 17.25p per share (2016: 15.85p per share) will not be provided for until authorised by Shareholders at the 
forthcoming AGM. There are no income tax consequences.

The total value of dividends proposed but not recognised at 31 December 2017 is £20,932,000 (2016: £18,997,000) excluding special dividend.

Reserves
Other reserves
Other reserves as disclosed on the Statement of Financial Position comprise the capital redemption reserve, translation reserve, cash flow 
hedging reserve and treasury reserve. For the Company this also includes a special reserve.

Capital redemption reserve
The capital redemption reserve represents the nominal value of shares repurchased and cancelled during 2007.

Translation reserve
The translation reserve comprises all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of 
foreign subsidiaries.

Cash flow hedging reserve
The cash flow hedging reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging instruments 
relating to hedged transactions that have not yet occurred.

Treasury reserve
The treasury reserve comprises the cost of the Company’s shares held by the Group.

Special reserve
The special reserve arose on the issuance of shares in connection with acquisitions made by the Company in earlier years.

23 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The main financial risks arising in the normal course of the Group’s business are credit risk, liquidity risk, and market risks arising from interest 
rate risk and foreign currency risk. This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to each of the above risks, the Group’s objectives, 
policies and processes for measuring and managing risks and the Group’s management of capital. Further quantitative disclosures are included 
throughout these financial statements.

Credit risk and credit quality 
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual obligations 
and arises principally from the Group’s trade receivables.

The maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying amount of each financial asset and, as at the Statement of Financial Position 
date, in the Directors’ opinion, there were no significant concentrations of credit risk likely to cause financial loss to the Group. 

The Group has a credit policy in place and the exposure to credit risk is monitored on an ongoing basis. Credit evaluations are performed on all 
new customers requiring credit and these are frequently reviewed by management to limit exposure. Businesses must obtain central approval 
from Executive Directors or senior executive management for credit limits in excess of £10,000. The Group does not require collateral in respect 
of financial assets.

The credit control procedures described above, coupled with the diversified nature of the Group’s trade receivables, lead the Directors to believe 
that there is limited credit risk exposure and that the credit quality of these assets is robust.

119

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

23 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS CONTINUED
Other receivables comprise amounts due to the Group which historically have been received within three months of the year-end. The Directors 
have considered the inherent risk profile of other receivables at the year-end and are of the view that this historical experience will prevail for the 
foreseeable future and accordingly consider the credit quality of these assets to be robust.

Cash and cash equivalents represent deposits with reputable financial institutions in the UK and Continental Europe and hence, the Directors 
consider the credit quality of cash and cash equivalents to be robust.

The carrying amount of financial assets at the Statement of Financial Position date was:

Trade and other receivables (note 15)
Derivative assets (note 15)
Cash and cash equivalents (note 16)

Group

2017
£000

122,863
8
42,030

164,901

2016
£000

124,219
232
59,339

183,790

Company

2017
£000

20,928
–
16,646

37,574

2016
£000

16,589
232
28,171

44,992

The fair values of the above financial assets at both 31 December 2017 and 2016, are deemed to approximate to carrying value due to the 
short-term maturity of the instruments.

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the Statement of Financial Position date by geographic region was:

UK
Continental Europe

The ageing of trade receivables at the Statement of Financial Position date was:

Group

Not past due
Past due 0–30 days
Past due 31–120 days

Group

Company

2017
£000

81,989
12,663

94,652

2016
£000

85,207
12,382

97,589

2017
£000

–
–

–

2016
£000

–
–

–

2017

2016

Gross
£000

Impairment
£000

85,038
8,330
3,972

97,340

–
(415)
(2,273)

(2,688)

Gross
£000

87,384
8,382
4,192

99,958

Impairment
£000

–
(234)
(2,135)

(2,369)

All other receivables and derivative financial assets are not past due (2016: not past due).

The Company had trade receivables of £nil (2016: £nil).

The movement in the allowance for impairment in respect of trade receivables during the year was as follows:

Balance at 1 January
Amounts acquired
Amounts provided
Amounts utilised
Effect of movements in foreign exchange

Balance at 31 December

Group

2017
£000

2,369
125
1,198
(1,017)
13

2,688

2016
£000

2,588
–
849
(1,205)
137

2,369

Company

2017
£000

2016
£000

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

Based on historic default rates, the Group believes that no general impairment allowance is necessary in respect of trade receivables, however, 
the Group provides fully for specific debts when required. During the year the Group’s impairment loss as a percentage of revenue amounted to 
0.17% (2016: 0.12%).

120

 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

23 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS CONTINUED
Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s approach to managing liquidity 
is to ensure, as far as possible, that it will always have sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities when due, with sufficient headroom to cope with 
abnormal market conditions. As at 31 December 2017 cash and cash equivalents covered the amounts of borrowings maturing in the next 
12 months with a net positive liquidity of £41,797,000 (2016: £59,115,000). Details of the total facilities that the Group has access to are given in 
note 17.

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities:

31 December 2017 
Group

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Unsecured bank loans
Trade and other payables

31 December 2016 
Group

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Bank overdraft
Unsecured bank loans
Trade and other payables
Derivative financial liabilities
Other derivatives

31 December 2017 
Company

Non-derivative financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

31 December 2016 
Company

Non-derivative financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

2–5
years
£000

More than
5 years
£000

Carrying 
amount
£000

Contractual
cash flows
£000

1 year
or less
£000

6,752
172,345

(7,033)
(172,345)

(307)
(167,407)

179,097

(179,378)

(167,714)

Carrying 
amount
£000

Contractual
cash flows
£000

1 year
or less
£000

4
6,717
166,657

(4)
(7,062)
(166,657)

(4)
(298)
(166,657)

30

(30)

(30)

173,408

(173,753)

(166,989)

Carrying 
amount
£000

Contractual
cash flows
£000

1–2
years
£000

(305)
(1,489)

(1,794)

1–2
years
£000

–
(295)
–

–

(295)

1 year
or less
£000

(6,421)
(3,449)

(9,870)

2–5
years
£000

–
(584)
–

–

(584)

1–2
years
£000

39,668

(39,668)

(39,668)

–

Carrying 
amount
£000

Contractual
cash flows
£000

1 year
or less
£000

35,971

(35,971)

(35,971)

1–2
years
£000

–

–
–

–

More than
5 years
£000

–
(5,885)
–

–

(5,885)

2–5
years
£000

–

2–5
years
£000

–

The value of the Group’s and Company’s financial liabilities as detailed above at 31 December 2017 and 2016 were not materially different to the 
carrying value. Fair values were calculated using market rates, where available. Where market values are not available, fair values have been 
estimated by discounting expected future cash flows using prevailing interest rate curves. Amounts denominated in foreign currencies are 
valued at the exchange rate prevailing at the Statement of Financial Position date.

The table below sets out the Group’s accounting classification of each class of financial assets and liabilities at 31 December 2017 and 2016.

31 December 2017 

Cash and cash equivalents
Borrowings due within one year
Borrowings due after one year
Trade payables
Non-trade payables 
Trade receivables
Other receivables
Provisions
Derivative assets

Available
for sale
£000

Other
derivatives
at fair value 
£000

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8

8

Amortised
cost
£000

42,030
(233)
(6,519)
(149,594)
(27,689)
94,652
28,211
(2,048)
–

Total
carrying
value
£000

42,030
(233)
(6,519)
(149,594)
(27,689)
94,652
28,211
(2,048)
8

(21,190)

(21,182)

121

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

23 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS CONTINUED

31 December 2016 

Cash and cash equivalents
Bank overdraft
Borrowings due within one year
Borrowings due after one year
Trade payables
Non-trade payables 
Trade receivables
Other receivables
Provisions
Derivative liabilities
Derivative assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Available
for sale
£000

Other
derivatives
at fair value 
£000

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(30)
232

202

Amortised
cost
£000

59,343
(4)
(224)
(6,493)
(141,999)
(24,658)
97,589
26,630
(1,531)
–
–

Total
carrying
value
£000

59,343
(4)
(224)
(6,493)
(141,999)
(24,658)
97,589
26,630
(1,531)
(30)
232

8,653

8,855

Under IAS 39, all derivative financial instruments not in a hedge relationship are measured at fair value through the income statement. The 
Group does not use derivatives for speculative purposes. All transactions in derivative financial instruments are undertaken to manage the risks 
arising from underlying business activities.

Interest rate risk
The Company and Group are exposed to interest rate fluctuations on their borrowings and cash deposits. Borrowings are principally held in 
sterling and euros at both fixed and floating rates. Deposits are in sterling, euros and Swiss francs at floating rates. 

Floating rate borrowings are linked to the London Interbank Offered Rate and Euribor Over Night Index Average. The Group adopts a policy of 
reviewing its floating rate exposure to ensure that if interest rates rise the effect on the Group’s income statement is manageable.

At the reporting date the interest rate profile of the Group’s interest-bearing financial instruments was:

Variable rate instruments
Financial assets
Financial liabilities

Group 
Carrying amount

Company 
Carrying amount

2017
£000

2016
£000

2017
£000

42,030
(6,752)

35,278

59,343
(6,721)

52,622

16,646
–

16,646

2016
£000

28,171
–

28,171

Sensitivity analysis
A change of 100 basis points in the interest rates at the reporting date would have increased/(decreased) equity and profit or loss by the 
amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign currency rates, remain constant. The analysis is 
performed on the same basis for 2016.

31 December 2017
Variable rate instruments

31 December 2016
Variable rate instruments

Group

Company

Profit or loss

Equity

Profit or loss

Equity

100bp 
increase
£000

100bp 
decrease 
£000

100bp 
increase
£000

100bp 
decrease 
£000

100bp 
increase
£000

100bp 
decrease 
£000

100bp 
increase
£000

100bp 
decrease 
£000

353

526

(353)

(526)

–

–

–

–

166

282

(166)

(282)

–

–

–

–

Commodity risk
The Company and Group are exposed to the commodity risk of rising fuel prices. On 1 November 2015, in order to manage this risk, the Group 
entered into a hedging instrument that was a two-year commodity transaction swap. The risk hedged was the diesel fuel price risk, being the 
change in fuel price payments on the specified diesel consumption. The notional amount was 6,768 metric tons, under which a fixed diesel price 
of £348.25 per metric ton was paid monthly and the floating price according to Platts European was received.

The fair value of this diesel commodity swap is £nil in the Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 2017, it having terminated on 
31 October 2017 (2016: £232,000 asset).

On 31 December 2017 there were no commodity transaction swaps entered into by the Group. 

122

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

23 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS CONTINUED 
Sensitivity analysis
A change of 100 basis points in the diesel price at the reporting date would have increased/(decreased) equity and profit or loss by the amounts 
shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables remain constant. The analysis is performed on the same basis for 2016.

31 December 2017
Variable rate instruments

31 December 2016
Variable rate instruments

Group

Company

Profit or loss

Equity

Profit or loss

Equity

100bp 
increase
£000

100bp 
decrease 
£000

100bp 
increase
£000

100bp 
decrease 
£000

100bp 
increase
£000

100bp 
decrease 
£000

100bp 
increase
£000

100bp 
decrease 
£000

–

2

–

(2)

–

–

–

–

–

2

–

(2)

–

–

–

–

Foreign currency risk
The Group and Company are exposed to movements in currency exchange rates arising from transaction currency cash flows and the 
translation of the results and net assets of overseas subsidiaries. The currencies giving rise to this risk are primarily the euro, Swiss franc and 
US dollar.

The Group and Company use forward exchange contracts to hedge their foreign currency transactional risk. A future foreign currency contract 
would be entered into where there was a known requirement for the currency due to planned imports that are not invoiced in the functional 
currency of the acquiring company. These forward exchange contracts would have a maturity of less than one year after the Statement of 
Financial Position date. The Group also enters into foreign currency contracts at spot rate where the amounts are not frequent or material. Gains 
and losses on currency contracts recognised as an asset at 31 December 2017 amounted to £8,000 (2016: liability of £30,000).

For the 12-month period to 31 December 2017, 3.1% (2016: 2.0%) of the Group’s operating profit was derived from overseas subsidiaries and at 
31 December 2017, 18.8% (2016: 17.7%) of the Group’s net operating assets related to overseas subsidiary operations. Hedge accounting, 
following the adoption of IFRS, has not been applied to these operations.

The Group and Company do not use derivatives other than as described above.

The exposure to foreign currency risk was as follows:

2017

Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other payables

2016

Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other payables

Euro
amount
£000

109
364
(5,483)

(5,010)

Euro
amount
£000

65
420
(1,472)

(987)

Group

Other
amount
£000

133
109
(1,496)

(1,254)

Group

Other
amount
£000

195
597
(2,211)

(1,419)

Total
£000

242
473
(6,979)

(6,264)

Total
£000

260
1,017
(3,683)

(2,406)

Euro
amount
£000

–
49
–

49

Euro
amount
£000

–
177
–

177

Company

Other
amount
£000

–
–
–

–

Company

Other
amount
£000

–
1
–

1

Total
£000

–
49
–

49

Total
£000

–
178
–

178

123

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

23 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS CONTINUED 
Sensitivity analysis
A 10% weakening of sterling against the following currencies at 31 December would have increased/(decreased) profit or loss by the amounts 
shown below; there is no equity effect. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular interest rates, remain constant. The analysis is 
performed on the same basis for 2016.

Euro

Other

Group

Company

2017
£000

(501)

(125)

2016
£000

(99)

(142)

2017
£000

5

–

2016
£000

18

–

A 10% strengthening of sterling against the above currencies at 31 December would have had the equal but opposite effect on the above 
currencies to the amounts shown above, on the basis that all other variables remain constant.

Fair values hierarchy
The financial instruments carried at fair value are categorised according to their valuation method. The different levels have been defined below:
•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.
•  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly, as prices or 

indirectly, derived from prices.

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

The Group had a diesel commodity swap used for hedging which was fair valued in accordance with level 2 for the year ended 31 December 2017 
(2016: level 2) and forward currency contracts which were fair valued in accordance with level 2 (2016: level 2).

Fair values
The carrying amounts shown in the Statement of Financial Position for financial instruments are a reasonable approximation of fair value.

Trade receivables, trade payables and cash and cash equivalents
Fair values are assumed to approximate to cost due to the short-term maturity of the instrument.

Borrowings, other financial assets and other financial liabilities
Where available, market values have been used to determine fair values. Where market values are not available, fair values have been estimated 
by discounting expected future cash flows using prevailing interest rate curves. Amounts denominated in foreign currencies are valued at the 
exchange rate prevailing at the Statement of Financial Position date.

Capital management
The Group views its finance capital resources as primarily comprising share capital, bank loans and operating cash flow.

The Board’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base so as to maintain investor, creditor and market confidence and to sustain future 
development of the business. The Board closely monitors its Shareholder base, dividend yield and earnings per share. In the medium-term the 
Group aims to maintain a dividend cover of 1.6 times.

The Board encourages employees of the Group to hold the Company’s ordinary shares. The Group operates a number of employee share option 
schemes. In previous years the Company has acquired a number of its own shares under a share buy-back programme, and some of these 
shares have been used for issuing shares under the Group’s various share option incentive schemes. 

Certain of the Company’s subsidiaries are required to maintain issued share capital at levels to support capital adequacy requirements prevailing 
in the legislative environment in which they operate.

In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group may adjust the amount of dividends made payable to Shareholders, return capital 
to Shareholders, issue new shares or sell assets to reduce debt.

On 7 December 2017, the Group completed a refinancing of its banking facilities to maintain headroom whilst also providing funds for the Groups 
acquisition and investment strategy. The new facilities comprise a £72.5 million sterling committed facility, a €8.6 million euro committed facility 
and a £25 million sterling uncommitted facility. This represents an increase in total available facilities of £25 million. 

The uncommitted facility, coupled with cash generated from operations, is used to fund the Group’s ongoing working capital requirements. The 
committed facility is in place to support the Group’s strategic investment plans.

No changes were made to the objectives, policies or processes during the years ended 31 December 2017 and 31 December 2016.

124

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

24 ACQUISITIONS 
On 28 February 2017, a subsidiary company of Headlam Group plc entered into an agreement to acquire Mitchell Carpets Limited. The company 
is a distributor of floorcovering in the south east of England. 

On 28 April 2017, a subsidiary company of Headlam Group plc entered into an agreement to acquire the business and certain assets of McMillan 
Flooring. McMillan Flooring is a distributor of contract floorcovering in Scotland. 

On 7 December 2017, Headlam Group plc entered into an agreement to acquire Domus Group of Companies Limited and its subsidiary  
entities. The Domus Group is the UK’s leading specification consultant and supplier of hard surfaces for premium construction and 
refurbishment projects.

The acquired businesses contributed revenues of £4.5 million and an operating loss of £0.1 million to the Group for the year ended 31 December 
2017. If the acquisitions had occurred on 1 January 2017, pro-forma revenue and operating profit for the year ended 31 December 2017 would 
have increased by £33.9 million and £3.1 million respectively. 

Details of the acquisitions are provisional and are shown in aggregate below:

Acquiree’s
book value
£000

Fair value 
adjustments 
£000

Acquisition 
amounts
£000

Acquiree’s provisional net assets at the acquisition date:
Intangible assets
Acquired goodwill
Tangible fixed assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash at bank and in hand
Trade and other payables
Borrowings
Provisions
Deferred tax

Net identifiable assets and liabilities

Goodwill on acquisition

Consideration

Satisfied by:
Cash
Deferred and contingent consideration

Analysis of cash flows:
On completion
Cash acquired
Borrowing repayment
Costs of acquisition

–
8,778
870
3,893
6,192
2,171
(7,190)
(6,643)
–
–

8,071

11,809
(8,778)
–
(747)
375
–
254
(399)
(195)
(1,914)

405

23,396

11,809
–
870
3,146
6,567
2,171
(6,936)
(7,042)
(195)
(1,914)

8,476

23,396

31,872

26,934
4,938

31,872

26,934
(2,171)
7,042
869

32,674

Professional fees of £0.9 million were incurred on the acquisitions and have been expensed to the income statement within administration 
expenses.

The book value of receivables given in the table above represents the gross contracted amounts receivable. At the acquisition date, the entire 
book value of receivables was expected to be collected.

Goodwill of £23.4 million arose on the acquisitions, there were also intangible assets on acquisition of £11.8 million which were attributed to 
brand names, order book and customer relationships as shown in note 11. During the year £0.9 million of intangibles have been amortised to the 
income statement.

The residual goodwill reflects the significant benefit the acquisitions will have on the Group by bringing further geographic coverage, offering an 
expanded product range, developing a more sophisticated customer route to market, providing an additional avenue for growth and a different 
order profile. The Domus acquisition is complementary to the Group’s market-leading core business which supplies a high volume of small 
orders into both the residential and commercial sectors and has minimal overlap in terms of current product lines, suppliers and customer base. 
Domus diversifies and broadens Headlam’s overall position in the floorcoverings market with entry into ceramics and an increased weighting in 
engineered wood, LVT and laminate, incorporating product lines that continue to achieve ongoing growth in the market. 

In addition, Domus significantly increases the Group’s presence in the commercial specification market and brings considerable expertise into 
the Group, providing a platform to pursue further domestic and international growth opportunities.

125

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

Furthermore, acquired businesses gain access to the Group’s extensive product ranges and benefit from enhanced sales and marketing 
investment. These changes typically enable acquired businesses to enhance the service provided to their customers and ultimately, develop  
and grow.

Deferred and contingent consideration
The acquisition of Domus Group of Companies Limited was financed by initial cash consideration of £24.2 million paid on completion and 
satisfied by the Group’s existing cash and debt facilities; a deferred consideration of £3.3 million, payable in cash and Ordinary shares of 5 pence 
each in the capital of the Company (‘Ordinary Shares’), of which £1.6 million is payable on 7 December 2019 and £1.7 million is payable on 7 
December 2020; and a further maximum contingent consideration of £2.7 million, payable in cash based on Domus achieving certain EBITDA 
targets over the three-year period ending 31 December 2020. 

The deferred and contingent consideration have been discounted back and reported at present value, and contingent consideration has been 
recognised based on management’s assessment of the probability of it being paid

There were no acquisitions made by the Group during the year ended 31 December 2016.

25 OPERATING LEASES
The aggregate payments, for which there are commitments under non-cancellable operating leases as at the end of the year, fall due as follows:

Group

Less than one year
Between one and five years
More than five years

Company

Less than one year
Between one and five years
More than five years

Land and 
buildings
£000

3,243
7,341
4,478

15,062

Land and 
buildings
£000

26
105
1,802

1,933

2017

Plant and 
machinery
£000

9,569
16,796
641

27,006

2017

Plant and 
machinery
£000

8
10
–

18

Total
£000

12,812
24,137
5,119

42,068

Total
£000

34
115
1,802

1,951

Land and 
buildings
£000

1,879
3,993
2,989

8,861

Land and 
buildings
£000

26
105
1,828

1,959

2016

Plant and 
machinery
£000

9,855
15,348
169

25,372

2016

Plant and 
machinery
£000

8
3
–

11

Total
£000

11,734
19,341
3,158

34,233

Total
£000

34
108
1,828

1,970

The Group leases the majority of its motor and commercial vehicles on terms that range between three and five years and during the year ended 
31 December 2017, total operating lease expense of £13,211,000 was recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement (2016: £13,520,000).

26 CAPITAL COMMITMENTS
Group
During the year ended 31 December 2017, the Group entered into commitments to purchase property, plant and equipment for £358,000  
(2016: £663,000). These commitments are expected to be settled in the following financial year.

Company
At the year ended 31 December 2017, the Company had no commitments to purchase property, plant and equipment (2016: £nil).

126

 
 
Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

27 RELATED PARTIES
Group and Company
Identity of related parties
The Group has a related party relationship with its subsidiaries and with its Directors and executive officers.

Transactions with key management personnel
The Group annually re-evaluates its interpretation of key management personnel and considers that this relates to the Executive and Non-
Executive Directors of the Group as identified on pages 44 and 45.

As at 31 December 2017, Directors of the Company and their immediate relatives controlled 0.8% of the voting shares of the Company 
(2016: 1.3%).

Non-Executive Directors receive a fee for their services to the Board.

Other than disclosed in the Remuneration Report, there were no other transactions with personnel in either the current or preceding year. The 
cost charged to administrative expenses relating to share plans of key personnel amounted to £507,000 (2016: £304,000).

Company only
In addition to the transactions with key personnel, the Company has the following transactions:

Transactions with other Group companies

Amounts due from subsidiaries

Amounts due to subsidiaries

Highest
during
the year
£000

Balance at
31 December 
2017
£000

20,460

20,460

Highest
during
the year
£000

16,292

Balance at
31 December 
2016
£000

16,292

(34,806)

(34,806)

(31,886)

(31,886)

Transactions with Group companies typically comprise management, rent and interest charges during the period. 

The disclosure of the year-end balance and the highest balance during the year is considered to provide a meaningful representation of 
transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries in the year. The highest balance is generally at the start or close of the financial year 
since this is the time when the Company levies its recharge of its operating expenses. 

Related party transactions reported in the income statement

Rental income 
Dividends received
Recharge of operating expenses
Interest income

For year 
ended 
31 December 
2017
£000

For year 
ended 
31 December 
2016
£000

7,971
38,378
3,140
163

7,971
31,522
2,576
163

127

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

28 SUBSEQUENT EVENTS
Management has given due consideration to any events occurring in the period from the reporting date to the date these financial statements 
were authorised for issue and has concluded that there are no material adjusting or non-adjusting events to be disclosed in these financial 
statements, with the exception of the acquisition of Dersimo BV. On 2 March 2018, Headlam Holdings BV, a group subsidiary company acquired 
100% of the issued share capital of Dersimo BV, a floorcovering distribution business based in The Netherlands, for a consideration of €4.1 
million, subject to finalising the net assets position.

GROUP SUBSIDIARIES

Company

HFD Limited
MCD Group Limited
Domus Tiles Limited
Headlam BV
LMS SA
Belcolor AG
Headlam (European) Limited
Headlam Holdings BV
Headlam SAS
Yourfloors Plc
Domus Group of Companies Limited
Tileco (2012) Bidco Ltd
Tileco Group (2007) Ltd
Tileco Group Limited
Crossforge Limited
Gorsey Eleven Limited
Headlam Group Employee Trust Company Limited
Headlam Group Pension Trustees Limited
Mercado Group Limited
NCT (International) Limited
Mitchell Carpets Limited
Tileright Limited
Tileco Limited
Domus Stone Limited
Surface Tiles Limited
Tile Solutions Limited

Type

Place of incorporation

Trading
Trading
Trading
Trading
Trading
Trading
Holding Company
Holding Company
Holding Company
Holding Company
Holding Company
Holding Company
Holding Company
Holding Company
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Netherlands**
France***
Switzerland****
Great Britain*
Netherlands**
France***
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*
Great Britain*

The ordinary share capital of all of these subsidiaries are wholly owned and their principal activities are wholly aligned to the sales, marketing, 
supply and distribution of floorcovering and certain other ancillary products.

  Registered address for UK subsidiaries: PO Box 1, Gorsey Lane, Coleshill, Birmingham, B46 1LW, UK.
*  
**  
  Registered address for Dutch subsidiaries: Bettinkhorst 4, 7207 BP Zutphen, the Netherlands.
***    Registered address for French subsidiaries: 7/14 Rue Du Fosse Blanc, 92230, Gennevilliers, France.
**** Registered address for Swiss subsidiaries: Zücherstrasse 493, 9015 St. Gallen, Switzerland.

128

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Financial Record

Trading results
Revenue
Gross profit
Overheads

Underlying profit before net financing costs
Net financing costs

Underlying profit on ordinary activities before tax
Taxation

Underlying profit on ordinary activities after taxation

Profit before tax

Shareholder value
Paid interim and final dividend per share
Paid special dividend per share
Proposed dividend per share
Earnings per share
Underlying earnings per share 

Net assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Deferred tax assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets
Current liabilities
Bank overdraft
Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings
Trade and other payables
Employee benefits
Income tax payable

Non-current liabilities
Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Deferred tax liabilities
Employee benefits

Total liabilities

Net assets

2017
£000

2016
£000

Restated*
2015
£000

Restated*
2014
£000

Restated**
2013
£000

707,764
220,081
(176,298)

693,572
212,504
(171,432)

654,078
200,510
(163,733)

635,242
190,540
(159,078)

603,051
181,255
(153,575)

43,783
(665)

43,118
(7,976)

35,142

40,719

22.55p
8.00p
25.25p
39.1p
41.7p

101,631
44,662
648

146,941

131,566
127,976
42,030

301,572

448,513

41,072
(966)

40,106
(7,601)

30,963

38,179

20.70p
6.00p
22.55p
36.8p
38.7p

102,934
10,388
1,138

114,460

126,037
128,934
59,343

314,314

428,774

–
(233)
(190,299)
(2,235)
(6,339) 

(4)
(224)
(183,304)
(2,169)
(6,824) 

36,777
(1,153)

35,624
(7,213)

28,411

35,624

17.50p
–
20.70p
33.8p
33.8p

104,677
10,388
629

115,694

118,165
120,300
63,932

302,397

418,091

–
–
(171,375)
(2,171)
(6,974)

31,462
(1,162)

30,300
(6,515)

23,785

30,300

15.30p
–
17.50p
28.6p
28.6p

106,875
10,013
515

117,403

115,591
118,962
47,589

282,142

399,545

–
(204)
(165,240)
(2,933)
(6,073)

27,680
(1,241)

26,439
(6,146)

20,293

21,087

14.85p
–
15.30p
18.0p
24.5p

106,493
10,013
354

116,860

114,700
119,634
47,477

281,811

398,671

–
(218)
(164,856)
(2,842)
(7,022)

(199,106)

(192,525)

(180,520)

(174,450)

(174,938)

(6,519)
(4,938)
(2,048)
(6,847)
(10,481)

(6,493)
–
(1,531)
(4,077)
(20,781)

(30,833)

(32,882)

(20,000)
–
(1,087)
(4,533)
(16,843)

(42,463)

(22,818)
–
(787)
(3,931)
(18,803)

(46,339)

(33,239)
–
(790)
(2,742)
(12,780)

(49,551)

(229,939)

(225,407)

(222,983)

(220,789)

(224,489)

218,574

203,367

195,108

178,756

174,182

*   The balance sheets for 2015, 2014 and 2013 were restated in order to: align certain accounting policies of overseas companies; better reflect the net value of certain 

inventory product lines; reassess deferred tax in relation to property; and to reclassify certain balances in order to present them in a consistent manner with subsequent 
years. This is fully described in the Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2016.

**   Restated to reflect the changes for revised IAS 19 and also * shown above.

129

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes

130

Overview

Strategic Report 

Governance

Financial Statements

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes

131

Headlam Group plc
Annual report and accounts 2017

Notes

132

FLOORCOVERINGS

ADVISERS

Auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Cornwall Court
19 Cornwall Street
Birmingham B3 2DT

Taxation Advisers
Deloitte LLP
Four Brindleyplace
Birmingham B1 2HZ

Principal Bankers
Barclays Bank PLC
PO Box 3333
One Snowhill
Snow Hill
Queensway
Birmingham B3 2WN

HSBC Bank Plc
Level 6, Metropolitan House
CBX 3
321 Avebury Boulevard
Milton Keynes MK9 2GA

The Royal Bank of Scotland plc 
Corporate and Institutional Banking
5th Floor, 2 St Philips Place
Birmingham B3 2RB

Solicitors
Pinsent Masons LLP
3 Colmore Circus
Birmingham B4 6BH

Stockbroker
Investec Bank plc
2 Gresham Street
London EC2V 7QP

Financial PR and IR
Buchanan
107 Cheapside
London EC2V 6DN

Registrars
Link Asset Services
The Registry
34 Beckenham Road
Beckenham
Kent BR3 4TU

FINANCIAL CALENDAR

Statutory Announcements
Annual General Meeting 
Interim results announced  
Final results announced  

24 May 2018
22 August 2018
March 2019

Dividend Dates
Final dividend for 2017, if approved, payable to 
qualifying shareholders on the register as at 1 June 2018  6 July 2018
Interim dividend for 2018 declared 
Interim dividend for 2018 payable 

22 August 2018
2 January 2019

H

e

a

d

l

a

m

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

f

o

r

t

h

e

y

e

a

r

e

n

d

e

d

3

1

D

e

c

e

m

b

e

r

2

0

1

7

Headlam Group plc
PO Box 1
Gorsey Lane
Coleshill
Birmingham
B46 1LW

E-mail: headlamgroup@headlam.com

www.headlam.com